E 5 1 U s e r G u i d e
The availability of particular products and applications for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and
availability of language options.
Export controls
This device may contain commodities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion
contrary to law is prohibited.
Model number: E51-1
C o n t e n t s
Select ringing tones...................................................25
Customise profiles......................................................25
Change the display theme.........................................25
Download a theme.....................................................26
Change audio themes................................................26
3-D ringing tones.......................................................26
Volume control..............................................................27
One-touch keys..............................................................27
Home key....................................................................27
Contacts key................................................................27
Calendar key................................................................28
E-mail key....................................................................28
Multitasking...................................................................28
Memory..........................................................................28
Free memory...............................................................28
Memory card...............................................................29
Use a memory card..................................................29
Eject the memory card............................................30
Write text.......................................................................30
Traditional text input.................................................30
Predictive text input..................................................31
Change the writing language...................................31
Antennas........................................................................31
Further information......................................................32
F o r y o u r s a f e t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
About your device.........................................................11
Network services...........................................................11
Enhancements, batteries, and chargers.....................12
G e t s t a r t e d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3
Insert the SIM card and battery...................................13
Charge the battery........................................................14
Keys and parts...............................................................15
Connect the headset.....................................................16
Attach the wrist strap...................................................16
First start-up..................................................................16
Lock the keys.................................................................17
Display indicators..........................................................17
Nokia support and contact information.....................19
Y o u r N o k i a E 5 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0
Settings wizard.............................................................20
Standby modes..............................................................21
Active standby............................................................21
Standby.......................................................................21
Menu...............................................................................22
Common actions in several applications....................22
Transfer..........................................................................23
Transfer content between devices...........................23
View transfer log........................................................24
Synchronise, retrieve, and send data.......................24
Personalisation..............................................................24
Profiles.........................................................................24
B u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3
Telephone......................................................................33
Voice calls....................................................................33
Answer a call............................................................33
Make a call................................................................33
Make a conference call............................................34
Fax calls....................................................................34
Video calls...................................................................34
Manage contact groups.............................................43
Add ringing tones for contacts.................................43
Send business cards...................................................44
Manage received business cards..............................44
SIM directory...............................................................44
Make a video call.....................................................34 Calendar.........................................................................45
Share a video...........................................................35
Receive a video sharing invitation........................35
Net calls.......................................................................35
Create a net call profile...........................................36
Connect to the net call service...............................36
Make net calls...........................................................37
Net call service settings..........................................37
Speed dialling.............................................................37
Call divert....................................................................37
Call barring..................................................................38
Create calendar entries..............................................45
Create a meeting entry..............................................46
To-do entries..............................................................46
Calendar views............................................................46
Work in different views..........................................47
Month view..............................................................47
Week view................................................................47
Day view...................................................................47
To-do view...............................................................47
Calendar settings........................................................47
Bar net calls.................................................................38 Web................................................................................48
Send DTMF tones........................................................39
Voice mail....................................................................39
Voice aid.........................................................................39
Launch an application................................................40
Change profiles...........................................................41
Voice command settings...........................................41
Log..................................................................................41
Connection security....................................................48
Browse the web..........................................................48
Bookmarks..................................................................49
End a connection........................................................49
M e s s a g i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 0
Call and data registers...............................................41 Messaging folders.........................................................50
Monitor all communications.....................................41 Organise messages.......................................................51
Call and send messages from Log.............................42 Message reader.............................................................51
Log settings................................................................42 Speech............................................................................51
Contacts..........................................................................42
Copy contacts between SIM and device
Edit the voice properties...........................................51
E-mail messages............................................................52
Set up your e-mail with the mailbox guide.............52
Connect to a remote mailbox....................................53
memory.......................................................................42
Manage contacts.........................................................42
Read and reply to e-mail...........................................53
Write and send e-mail...............................................54
Delete messages.........................................................54
Subfolders in your remote e-mail.............................54
Text messages...............................................................54
Write and send text messages..................................54
Sending options for text messages..........................55
Text messages on the SIM card.................................55
View picture messages..............................................55
Forward picture messages........................................56
Multimedia messages...................................................56
Create and send multimedia messages...................56
Receive and reply to multimedia messages............57
Create presentations..................................................57
View presentations....................................................58
View and save multimedia attachments.................58
Forward a multimedia message...............................58
Send a sound clip.......................................................59
Sending options for multimedia messages.............59
Special message types..................................................59
Cell broadcast................................................................60
Messaging settings.......................................................60
Text message settings...............................................60
Multimedia message settings...................................61
E-mail account settings.............................................62
Connection settings.................................................62
User settings............................................................62
Retrieval settings.....................................................62
Automatic retrieval settings...................................63
Service message settings..........................................63
Cell broadcast settings...............................................63
Other settings.............................................................63
N o k i a O f f i c e T o o l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4
Active notes...................................................................64
Create and edit notes.................................................64
Settings for Active notes............................................64
Search.............................................................................65
Search for information..............................................65
Search results..............................................................65
Calculator.......................................................................65
File manager..................................................................66
Quickoffice.....................................................................66
Work with files...........................................................66
Nokia Team suite..........................................................66
Work with teams........................................................67
Edit teams...................................................................67
Nokia Team Suite settings.........................................67
Action bar settings.....................................................67
Converter........................................................................68
Convert measurements..............................................68
Set base currency and exchange rate......................68
Zip manager...................................................................68
Print files.....................................................................69
Printing options.........................................................69
Printer settings...........................................................70
Clock...............................................................................70
Alarm clock..................................................................70
World clock.................................................................70
Clock settings..............................................................70
Notes..............................................................................71
Write and send notes.................................................71
F r e e t i m e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2
Camera...........................................................................72
Capture an image.......................................................72 Push to talk....................................................................81
Record a video clip.....................................................72
Camera settings..........................................................73
Gallery............................................................................73
Work with media files and folders...........................73
View images................................................................73
Manage image files....................................................74
RealPlayer......................................................................74
PTT settings................................................................82
Log in to PTT service..................................................82
Make a PTT call...........................................................82
Created PTT calls.........................................................82
Manage PTT contacts.................................................83
Create a PTT channel..................................................83
Exit PTT........................................................................83
Play video clips and stream links..............................74 About GPS and satellite signals...................................83
Send audio files and video clips...............................75 Positioning settings......................................................84
View information about a media clip......................75 Nokia Maps.....................................................................85
RealPlayer settings.....................................................75
Music player...................................................................75
Listen to music...........................................................75
Track lists....................................................................76
Music categories.........................................................76
Preset frequency settings..........................................76
Recorder.........................................................................76
Download maps..........................................................85
Satellite information..................................................86
Browse maps..............................................................86
Find a place.................................................................87
Plan a route.................................................................87
Navigation...................................................................87
Guides..........................................................................88
Record a sound clip....................................................77 GPS data.........................................................................88
Play a recording..........................................................77
Use GPS data...............................................................88
Recorder settings.......................................................77 Landmarks.....................................................................89
Define IM settings.......................................................78
Start a conversation...................................................78
IM groups....................................................................78
Block users..................................................................79
IM application settings..............................................79
Edit landmarks............................................................89
Landmark categories.................................................89
Receive landmarks.....................................................90
C o n n e c t i v i t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1
Flash player....................................................................80 Fast downloading.........................................................91
Manage flash files.......................................................80 Nokia PC Suite................................................................91
Visual radio....................................................................80 Data cable......................................................................91
Listen to the radio......................................................80 Infrared..........................................................................92
View visual content....................................................81 Bluetooth.......................................................................92
Saved stations.............................................................81
Visual Radio settings..................................................81
About Bluetooth.........................................................92
Send and receive data with Bluetooth.....................93
Pair devices.................................................................94 Activation keys............................................................108
Security tips................................................................95 Use activation keys..................................................108
SIM access profile..........................................................95 Data synchronisation..................................................109
Wireless LAN..................................................................96
WLAN connections......................................................96
See WLAN availability.................................................96
Create a synchronisation profile.............................110
Select applications to synchronise.........................110
Synchronisation connection settings.....................110
WLAN wizard...............................................................96 Download!...................................................................110
Internet access points..................................................97
Set up an internet access point for packet data
Select catalogs, folders, and items.........................111
Download! settings..................................................111
(GPRS)..........................................................................98 Software updates........................................................111
Advanced internet access point settings for packet
S e t t i n g s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
data (GPRS)..................................................................98
Set up an access point for WLAN manually..............99 General settings..........................................................113
Advanced access point settings for WLAN...............99
Modem.........................................................................100
Connection manager..................................................100
View and end active connections...........................100
Search for WLAN.......................................................100
Personalisation settings..........................................113
Display settings.....................................................113
Standby mode settings.........................................114
Tone settings.........................................................114
Language settings.................................................114
Notification light...................................................114
Date and time settings............................................115
Security settings.......................................................115
Device and SIM card security................................115
Restore original settings.........................................116
S e c u r i t y a n d d a t a m a n a g e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 2
Certificate manager....................................................103
View certificate details............................................104
Certificate trust settings..........................................104 Telephone settings.....................................................116
Security modules.........................................................104
View and edit security modules.............................105
Call settings...............................................................116
Network settings......................................................117
Back up data................................................................105 Connection settings....................................................117
Remote configuration................................................105
Application manager..................................................106
Install applications...................................................107
Installation settings.................................................107
Java security settings...............................................107
Access points............................................................117
Packet data (GPRS) settings....................................118
WLAN settings..........................................................118
Advanced WLAN settings.........................................118
WLAN security settings............................................119
WEP security settings...............................................119
WEP key settings......................................................119
802.1x security settings..........................................119
WPA security settings..............................................120
Wireless LAN plugins................................................120
EAP plug-ins...........................................................120
Use EAP plug-ins....................................................120
Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings..............120
Edit SIP profiles........................................................121
Edit SIP proxy servers...............................................121
Edit registration servers..........................................121
Net call settings........................................................122
Configuration settings.............................................122
Restrict packet data.................................................122
Application settings....................................................122
A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 6
Small children..............................................................136
Operating environment..............................................136
Medical devices...........................................................136
Implanted medical devices.....................................136
Hearing aids..............................................................137
Vehicles........................................................................137
Potentially explosive environments.........................137
Emergency calls...........................................................138
CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR)...........................138
M A N U F A C T U R E R ’ S L I M I T E D W A R R A N T Y . . . . . . 1 4 0
Warranty period..........................................................140
How to get warranty service.....................................141
What is not covered?..................................................141
Other important notices.............................................142
Limitation of Nokia's liability....................................143
Statutory obligations..................................................143
S h o r t c u t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3
General shortcuts........................................................123
G l o s s a r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 5
I n d e x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 4
N o k i a o r i g i n a l e n h a n c e m e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 9
Enhancements.............................................................129
Battery..........................................................................129
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 0
B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 3
Charging and discharging..........................................133
Nokia battery authentication guidelines.................134
Authenticate hologram...........................................134
What if your battery is not authentic?...................134
C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 5
F o r y o u r s a f e t y
Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may
be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide
for further information.
S W I T C H O F F W H E N R E F U E L I N G
Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do
not use near fuel or chemicals.
S W I T C H O N S A F E L Y
S W I T C H O F F N E A R B L A S T I N G
Do not switch the device on when wireless
phone use is prohibited or when it may
cause interference or danger.
Follow any restrictions. Do not use the
device where blasting is in progress.
U S E S E N S I B L Y
R O A D S A F E T Y C O M E S F I R S T
Use only in the positions as explained in the
product documentation. Do not touch the
antenna areas unnecessarily.
Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands
free to operate the vehicle while driving.
Your first consideration while driving should
be road safety.
Q U A L I F I E D S E R V I C E
Only qualified personnel may install or
I N T E R F E R E N C E
repair this product.
All wireless devices may be susceptible to
interference, which could affect
performance.
E N H A N C E M E N T S A N D B A T T E R I E S
Use only approved enhancements and
batteries. Do not connect incompatible
products.
S W I T C H O F F I N H O S P I T A L S
Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off
W A T E R - R E S I S T A N C E
near medical equipment.
Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it
S W I T C H O F F I N A I R C R A F T
dry.
Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can
cause interference in aircraft.
B A C K - U P C O P I E S
Remember to make back-up copies or keep
a writtenrecord ofallimportantinformation
stored in your device.
1 0
C O N N E C T I N G T O O T H E R D E V I C E S
requests, download content, and accept installations
only from trustworthy sources. To increase the security
of your devices, consider installing, using, and
regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and
other related software on your device and any
connected computer.
When connecting to any other device, read
its user guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible
products.
E M E R G E N C Y C A L L S
Ensure the phone function of the device is
switched on and in service. Press the end key
as many times as needed to clear the display
and return to the standby mode. Enter the
emergency number, then press the call key.
Give your location. Do not end the call until
given permission to do so.
W a r n i n g : To use any features in this device,
other than the alarm clock, the device must be
switched on. Do not switch the device on when
wireless device use may cause interference or danger.
During extended operation, such as an active video
sharing session or high-speed data connection, the
device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is
normal. If you suspect the device is not working
properly, take it to the nearest authorized service
facility.
A b o u t y o u r d e v i c e
The office applications support common features of
Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office
2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed
or modified.
The wireless device described in this guide is approved
for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900, and UMTS 850
and 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for
more information about networks.
When using the features in this device, obey all laws
and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate
rights of others, including copyrights.
N e t w o r k s e r v i c e s
Copyright protections may prevent some images,
music (including ringing tones), and other content
from being copied, modified, transferred, or
forwarded.
To use the phone you must have service from a wireless
service provider. Many of the features require special
network features. These features are not available on
all networks; other networks may require that you
make specific arrangements with your service provider
before you can use the network services. Your service
provider can give you instructions and explain what
charges will apply. Some networks may have
Your device supports internet connections and other
methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device
may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and
applications, and other harmful content. Exercise
caution and open messages, accept connectivity
1 1
limitations that affect how you can use network
services. For instance, some networks may not support For availability of approved enhancements, please
all language-dependent characters and services.
check with your dealer. When you disconnect the
power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the
plug, not the cord.
Your service provider may have requested that certain
features be disabled or not activated in your device. If
so, these features will not appear on your device menu.
Your device may also have a special configuration such
as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons.
Contact your service provider for more information.
This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL)
that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this
device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require
network support for these technologies.
E n h a n c e m e n t s ,
b a t t e r i e s , a n d
c h a r g e r s
Always switch the device off and disconnect the
charger before removing the battery.
Check the model number of any charger before use
with this device. This device is intended for use when
supplied with power from the AC-5 charger.
The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6MT.
W a r n i n g : Use only batteries, chargers, and
enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this
particular model. The use of any other types may
invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be
dangerous.
1 2
G e t s t a r t e d
Model number: Nokia E51-1.
Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E51.
I n s e r t t h e S I M c a r d a n d
b a t t e r y
For availability and information on using SIM card
services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the
service provider or other vendor.
3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area
on the card is facing the connectors on the device
and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the
device.
1. With the back of the device facing you, press the
release button (1) and slide the back cover off (2).
4. Insert the battery. Align the contacts of the battery
with the corresponding connectors on the battery
compartment and insert in the direction of the
arrow.
2. If the battery is inserted, lift the battery in the
direction of the arrow to remove it.
1 3
3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the
charger from the device, then from the wall outlet.
Your battery has been precharged at the factory, but
the charging levels may vary. To reach the full
operation time, charge the battery until it has been
fully charged according to the battery level indicator.
T i p : If you have old compatible Nokia chargers,
you can use them with the Nokia E51 by
attaching the CA-44 charger adapter to the old
charger. The adapter is available as a separate
enhancement.
5. Slide the back cover back to place.
C h a r g e t h e b a t t e r y
1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet.
2
2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery
is completely discharged, it may take a while before
the charging indicator starts scrolling.
1 4
6 — Navi™ scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a
selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the
display.
K e y s a n d p a r t s
7 — Selection key. Press the selection key to perform
the function shown above it on the display.
8— End key. Press the end keyto reject a call, endactive
calls and held calls, and with a long keypress, end data
connections.
9 — Backspace key. Press the key to delete items.
10 — Shift key. When writing text, press and hold the
key and select the text with the scroll key. Press this
key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silent and
General profiles.
11 — Press the key for a few seconds to switch on
Bluetooth connectivity. When writing text, press the
key and select M o r e s y m b o l s to access special
characters.
12 — Call key
13 — Selection key
14 — Infrared port
15 — Voice key. This key is used in the voice commands,
Recorder, and Push to talk applications.
16 — Notification light and light sensor
17 — Microphone
1 — Earpiece
2 — Power key
3 — Volume up key
18 — Headset connector
19 — Wrist strap hole
4 — Mute key. Press the key to mute the microphone
20 — Mini-USB port
during a call.
21 — Charger connector
5 — Volume down key
1 5
A t t a c h t h e w r i s t s t r a p
Thread the wrist strap
as shown, and tighten
it.
1 — Home key
2 — Contacts key
3 — E-mail key
4 — Calendar key
F i r s t s t a r t - u p
1. Press and hold the power key.
2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock
code, enter the code, and select O K .
C o n n e c t t h e h e a d s e t
3. When prompted, enter the country in
which you are located and the current
date and time. To find your country,
enter the first letters of the country
name. It is important to select the
correct country, because scheduled
calendar entries may change if you
change the country later and the new
country is located on a different time
zone
W a r n i n g : When you use the headset, your
ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not
use the headset where it can endanger your safety.
Connect the compatible headset to the headset
connector of your device.
4. The Welcome application opens.
Select from the various options, or
select E x i t to close the application.
To configure the various settings in your
device, use the Settings wizard application and the
wizards available in the standby mode. When you
switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card
provider and configure some settings automatically.
1 6
You can also contact your service provider for the
correct settings.
To lock the keys manually in the standby mode, press
the left selection key and * .
You can switch the device on with no SIM card inserted,
in which case the device starts up in the offline mode,
and you cannot use the network-dependent phone
functions.
To unlock the keys, press the
left selection key and * .
T i p : To lock the keys
in the menu or in an
open application,
To switch the device off, press and hold the power key.
press the power key
briefly, and select
L o c k k e y p a d . To
L o c k t h e k e y s
unlock, press the left
selection key and * .
When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be
possible to the official emergency number
programmed into your device.
The keypad of your device locks automatically to
prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To
change the period after which the keypad is locked,
select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
S e c u r i t y > P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d > K e y p a d a u t o l o c k
p e r i o d .
D i s p l a y i n d i c a t o r s
The device is being used in a GSM network
(network service). The bar next to the icon indicates
the signal strength of the network at your current
location. The higher the bar, the stronger the signal.
The device is being used in a UMTS network
(network service).
The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the
stronger the charge in the battery.
1 7
You have one or more unread messages in the
Inbox folder in Messaging.
A UMTS packet data connection is available (network
service).
You have received new e-mail in the remote
A UMTS packet data connection is active.
A UMTS packet data connection on hold.
mailbox.
There are messages waiting to be sent in the
Outbox folder in Messaging.
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is
supported and available (network service). The icon
may vary between regions.
You have one or more missed phone calls.
The keys of the device are locked.
An alarm is active.
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is
active. The icon may vary between regions.
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is on
hold. The icon may vary between regions.
You have selected the Silent profile, and the device
does not ring for an incoming call or message.
You have set the device to scan for WLANs, and a
Bluetooth is active.
WLAN is available.
Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth
connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your
device is trying to connect with another device.
A WLAN connection is active in a network that does
not have encryption.
A WLAN connection is active in a network that has
An infrared connection is active. If the indicator
blinks, your device is trying to connect to the other
device, or the connection has been lost.
encryption.
Your device is connected to a computer with a
USB data cable.
A GPRS packet data connection is available (network
service).
The second phone line is being used (network
service).
A GPRS packet data connection is active.
A GPRS packet data connection is on hold.
All calls are forwarded to another number. If
you have two phone lines, a number indicates the
active line.
An EGPRS packet data connection is available
(network service).
A headset is connected to the device.
An EGPRS connection is active.
The connection to a headset with Bluetooth
1 8
An EGPRS packet data connection is on hold.
connectivity has been lost.
A hands-free car kit is connected to the device.
A loopset is connected to the device.
A text phone is connected to the device.
Your device is synchronising.
You have an ongoing push-to-talk connection.
Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not
disturb mode, because the ringing type setting of your
device is set to B e e p o n c e or S i l e n t , or you have an
incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mode, you
cannot make PTT calls.
N o k i a s u p p o r t a n d
c o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n
Check www.nokia-asia.com/E51/support or your local
Nokia website for the latest guides, additional
information, downloads, and services related to your
Nokia product. You may also download free
configuration settings such as MMS, GPRS, e-mail, and
other services for your device model at www.nokia-
asia.com/phonesettings.
If you need to contact customer service, check the list
of local Nokia Care contact centres at www.nokia-
asia.com/contactus.
For maintenance services, check your nearest Nokia
service centre at www.nokia-asia.com/repair.
1 9
Y o u r N o k i a E 5 1
The images in this guide may differ from your device
display.
Settings wizard configures your device for settings
based on your network operator information. To use
these services, you may have to contact your service
provider to activate a data connection or other
services.
W e l c o m e
The availability of the different settings items in
Settings wizard depends on the features of the device,
SIM card, wireless service provider, and the availability
of the data in the Settings wizard database.
When you switch on your device for the first time, the
Welcome application opens. Select from the following:
•
•
T u t o r i a l provides information about your device
and shows you how to use it.
If Settings wizard is not available from your service
provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device.
S w i t c h enables you to transfer content, such as
devices," p. 23.
To start the wizard, select S t a r t . When you use the
wizard for the first time, you are guided through the
settings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserted,
you need to select the home country of your service
provider, and your service provider. If the country or
service provider suggested by the wizard is not correct,
select the correct one from the list. If the settings
configuration is interrupted, the settings are not
defined.
•
•
S e t t i n g s w i z a r d helps you configure various
settings. See "Settings wizard," p. 20.
O p e r a t o r contains a link to your operator's home
portal.
To open the Welcome application later, select M e n u >
H e l p > W e l c o m e .
To access the main view of the Settings wizard after
the wizard has finished the settings configuration,
select O K .
The available items may vary between regions.
In the main view, select O p t i o n s and from the
S e t t i n g s w i z a r d
following:
2 0
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t . w i z a r d .
•
O p e r a t o r — Configure operator-specific settings
such as MMS, internet, WAP, and streaming settings.
E - m a i l s e t t i n g s — Configure e-mail settings.
P u s h t o t a l k — Configure push-to-talk settings.
V i d e o s h a r i n g — Configure video sharing settings.
To change the functions of the selection keys in active
standby, select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >
G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > S t a n d b y m o d e >
S h o r t c u t s .
To use the basic standby mode, select M e n u > T o o l s >
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > S t a n d b y
m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y > O f f .
•
•
•
If you are not able to use Settings wizard, visit the
Nokia phone settings web site.
S t a n d b y
S t a n d b y m o d e s
In the basic standby mode,
you can see your service
provider, time, and different
indicators, such as
Your device has two different standby modes: active
standby mode and standby mode.
indicators for alarms.
A c t i v e s t a n d b y
To view the most recently
dialled numbers, press the
call key. Scroll to a number
or name, and press the call
key again to call the number.
After you have switched on
your device and it is ready
for use, but you have not
entered any characters or
made other selections, the
device is in the active
To call your voice mailbox
(network service), press and
hold 1 .
To view calendar information, scroll right.
To write and send text messages, scroll left.
To change these shortcuts, select M e n u > T o o l s >
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > S t a n d b y
m o d e > S h o r t c u t s .
standby mode. In the active
standby mode, you can view
different indicators such as
network operator indicators
or indicators for alarms, and
applications you want to
access fast.
To select applications that
you want to access from active standby, select M e n u >
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n >
S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y a p p s . .
2 1
To rearrange the folder, scroll to the application you
want to move, and select O p t i o n s > M o v e . A check
mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new
location, and select O K .
M e n u
Select M e n u .
The menu is a starting point
from which you can open all
applications in the device or
on a memory card.
To move an application to a different folder, scroll to
the application you want to move, and select
O p t i o n s > M o v e t o f o l d e r , the new folder, and O K .
To download applications from the web, select
The menu contains
O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d a p p l i c a t i o n s .
applications and folders,
which are groups of similar
applications. All
applications you install in
the device yourself are by
default saved in the
C o m m o n a c t i o n s i n
s e v e r a l a p p l i c a t i o n s
I n s t a l l a t i o n s folder.
You can find the following actions in several
To open an application,
scroll to it, and press the
scroll key.
applications:
To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device,
press the power key briefly.
To view the applications in a list, select O p t i o n s >
C h a n g e v i e w > L i s t v i e w . To return to the grid view,
select O p t i o n s > C h a n g e v i e w > G r i d v i e w .
If an application consists of
several tabs (see figure),
open a tab by scrolling right
or left.
To make the application icons and folders animated,
select O p t i o n s > I c o n a n i m a t i o n > O n .
To save the settings that you
To view the memory consumption of different
applications and data stored on the device or memory
card and to check the amount of free memory, select
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y d e t a i l s .
have configured in an
application, select B a c k .
To save a file, select
O p t i o n s > S a v e . There are
different saving options
depending on the
To create a new folder, select O p t i o n s > N e w
f o l d e r .
To rename a new folder, select O p t i o n s > R e n a m e .
application you use.
2 2
To send a file, select O p t i o n s > S e n d . You can send a you can also synchronise data between the two devices
file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or using
or send data from this device to the other device.
Bluetooth connectivity or infrared.
When you transfer data from your previous device, it
may require youto insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries
device does not need a SIM card when transferring
data.
To copy, press and hold the shift key, and select the text
with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and
select C o p y . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste
the text, press and hold the shift key, and select
P a s t e . This method may not work in applications that
have their own copy and paste commands.
Content is copied from the memory of the other device
to the corresponding location in your device. Copying
time depends on the amount of data to be transferred.
You can also cancel and continue later.
To select different items, such as messages, files, or
contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select
O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k to select one item
or O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k a l l to select all
items.
The necessary steps for data transfer may vary
depending on your device, and whether you have
interrupted data transfer earlier. The items that you
can transfer vary depending on the other device.
T i p : To select almost all items, first select
O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k a l l , then
select the items you do not want, and O p t i o n s >
M a r k / U n m a r k > U n m a r k .
T r a n s f e r c o n t e n t b e t w e e n
d e v i c e s
To select an object (for example, an attachment in a
document) scroll to the object so that square markers
appear on each side of the object.
To connect the two devices, follow the instructions on
the display. For some device models, the Transfer
application is sent to the other device as a message. To
install Transfer on the other device, open the message,
and follow the instructions on the display. On your new
Eseries device, select the content you want to copy
from the other device.
T r a n s f e r
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S w i t c h .
After the data transfer, you can save the shortcut with
the transfer settings to the main view to repeat the
same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select
O p t i o n s > S h o r t c u t s e t t i n g s .
You can transfer content, such as contacts, from a
compatible Nokia device to your new Eseries device
using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. The type of
content that can be transferred depends on the device
model. If the other device supports synchronisation,
2 3
V i e w t r a n s f e r l o g
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n
A transfer log is shown after every transfer.
You can personalise your device by adjusting the
various tones, background images, and screen savers,
for example.
To view the transfer details, scroll to the transferred
item in the log, and select O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s .
To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a
transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and
select O p t i o n s > V i e w l o g .
P r o f i l e s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > P r o f i l e s .
Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in
the log view. To start solving conflicts, select
O p t i o n s > S o l v e c o n f l i c t s .
You can adjust and customise the ringing tones, alert
tones, and other device tones for different events,
environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in
use is shown at the top of the display in the standby
mode. However, if the active profile is General, only
today's date is shown.
S y n c h r o n i s e , r e t r i e v e , a n d
s e n d d a t a
If you have previously transferred data to your device
with the Transfer application, select from the following
icons in the Transfer main view:
To create a new profile, select O p t i o n s > C r e a t e
n e w , and define the settings.
To customise a profile, select a profile and O p t i o n s >
P e r s o n a l i s e .
Synchronise data with a compatible device if the
other device supports synchronisation. With
synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to-date in
both devices.
To change a profile, select a profile and O p t i o n s >
A c t i v a t e . The Offline profile prevents your device from
accidentally switching on, sending or receiving
messages, or using wireless LAN, Bluetooth, or FM
radio; it also closes any internet connection that may
be in operation when the profile is selected. The Offline
profile does not prevent you from establishing a
wireless LAN or Bluetooth connection at a later time,
or from restarting the FM radio, so comply with any
applicable safety requirements when establishing and
using these features.
Retrieve data from the other device to your new
Eseries device.
Send data from your new Eseries device to your
other device.
2 4
To delete a profile that you created, select O p t i o n s >
D e l e t e p r o f i l e . You cannot delete the predefined
profiles.
device sounds a ringing tone that is a combination
of the spoken name of the contact and the selected
ringing tone.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R i n g i n g t y p e — Select how you want the ringing
tone to alert.
S e l e c t r i n g i n g t o n e s
R i n g i n g v o l u m e — Select the volume level of the
ringing tone.
To set a ringing tone for a profile, select O p t i o n s >
P e r s o n a l i s e > R i n g i n g t o n e . Select a ringing tone
from the list, or select D o w n l o a d s o u n d s to open a
bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for
downloading tones using the browser. Any
M e s s a g e a l e r t t o n e — Select a tone for received
text messages.
E - m a i l a l e r t t o n e — Select a tone for received e-
mail messages.
I M a l e r t t o n e — Select a tone for received instant
messages.
downloaded tones are saved to Gallery.
To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group
only, select O p t i o n s > P e r s o n a l i s e > A l e r t f o r , and
select the desired group. Phone calls coming from
outside that group have a silent alert.
V i b r a t i n g a l e r t — Select whether you want the
device to vibrate when you receive a call.
K e y p a d t o n e s — Set the volume level of the device
keypad tones.
•
•
W a r n i n g t o n e s — Set the warning tones on or off.
A l e r t f o r — You can set the device to ring only upon
calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected
contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that
group have a silent alert.
To change the message tone, select O p t i o n s >
P e r s o n a l i s e > M e s s a g e a l e r t t o n e .
C u s t o m i s e p r o f i l e s
•
P r o f i l e n a m e — You can give a name to a new
profile or rename an existing profile. The General
and Offline profiles cannot be renamed.
Select O p t i o n s > P e r s o n a l i s e , and define the
following:
•
R i n g i n g t o n e — Select a ringing tone from the list,
or select D o w n l o a d s o u n d s to open a bookmark
folder containing a list of bookmarks for
downloading tones using the browser. If you have
two alternate phone lines in use, you can specify a
ringing tone for each line.
C h a n g e t h e d i s p l a y t h e m e
Select M e n u > T o o l s > T h e m e s .
•
•
V i d e o c a l l t o n e — Select a ringing tone for video
calls.
To change the theme used in all applications, select the
G e n e r a l folder.
2 5
S a y c a l l e r ' s n a m e — When you select this option
and someone from your contacts list calls you, the
To change the theme used in the main menu, select the To play the sound before activating it, select O p t i o n s >
M e n u v i e w folder. P l a y v o i c e .
To change the theme for a particular application, select To create a new audio theme, select O p t i o n s > S a v e
the application-specific folder.
t h e m e .
To change the background image for the standby
To add 3-D effects to the audio theme, select O p t i o n s >
mode, select the W a l l p a p e r folder.
3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s .
To select an image or write a text for the screen saver, To set speech as the sound for an event, select
select the P o w e r s a v e r folder.
S p e e c h . Enter the desired text to the text field. The
S p e e c h option is not available if you have set S a y
c a l l e r ' s n a m e on in the current profile.
To select a language for the speech, select O p t i o n s >
D o w n l o a d a t h e m e
To download a theme, select O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d > S e t S p e e c h l a n g u a g e .
D o w n l o a d t h e m e s . Enter the link from which you
To use all the preset sounds in an event group, scroll to
want to download your theme. Once the theme is
the group, and select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e s o u n d s .
downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it.
To silence all the sounds in an event group, select
To preview a theme, select O p t i o n s > P r e v i e w .
O p t i o n s > D e a c t i v a t e s o u n d s .
To start using the selected theme, select O p t i o n s >
S e t .
3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s
Select M e n u > M e d i a > 3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s .
C h a n g e a u d i o t h e m e s
To enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing
tones, select 3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e e f f e c t s > O n . Not all
ringing tones support 3–D effects.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > T h e m e s > A u d i o t h e m e .
You can set sounds for various device events. The
sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both.
To change the 3–D effect that is applied to the ringing
To change the current audio theme, select A c t i v e
tone, select S o u n d t r a j e c t o r y and the desired effect.
a u d i o t h e m e .
To modify the 3–D effect, select from the following:
To set a sound for an event, open an event group, such
as ringing tones, scroll to the desired event, and press
the scroll key.
•
T r a j e c t o r y s p e e d — Select the speed at which
sound moves from one direction to another. This
setting is not available for all effects.
2 6
•
•
R e v e r b e r a t i o n — To adjust the amount of echo,
select the desired effect.
D o p p l e r e f f e c t — Select O n to have the ringing tone
sound higher when you are closer to your device,
and lower when you are farther away. This setting
is not available for all effects.
To listen to the ringing tone with the 3–D effect, select
1 — Home key
2 — Contacts key
3 — E-mail key
4 — Calendar key
O p t i o n s > P l a y t o n e .
To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select
M e n u > T o o l s > P r o f i l e s > O p t i o n s >
P e r s o n a l i s e > R i n g i n g v o l u m e .
H o m e k e y
To access the main menu, press the home key briefly.
Press the home key briefly again to access the active
standby.
V o l u m e c o n t r o l
To adjust the earpiece volume during a phone call or
the volume of the media applications, use the volume
keys.
To view the list of active applications, press the home
key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the
home key briefly to scroll the list. To open the selected
application, press the home key for a few seconds, or
press the scroll key. To close the selected application,
press the backspace key.
O n e - t o u c h k e y s
With the One-touch keys you can access applications
and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an
application and a task. To change these, select M e n u >
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n >
O n e - t o u c h k e y s . Your network operator may have
assigned applications to the keys, in which case you
cannot change them.
Leaving applications running in the background
increases the demand on battery power and reduces
the battery life.
C o n t a c t s k e y
To open the Contacts application, press the contacts
key briefly.
2 7
To create a new contact, press the contacts key for a
few seconds.
access the menu, and open the Web application.
Select a bookmark or enter the web address
manually, and select G o t o . To return to your
message, press and hold the home key, scroll to
the message and press the scroll key.
C a l e n d a r k e y
To open the Calendar application, press the calendar
key briefly.
M e m o r y
To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key
for a few seconds.
There are two types of memory into which you can save
data or install applications: device memory and
memory card.
E - m a i l k e y
To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key
briefly.
F r e e m e m o r y
To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key
for a few seconds.
To see how much memory is currently in use, how
much free memory remains, and how much memory is
consumed by each data type, select M e n u >
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y d e t a i l s > P h o n e m e m o r y or
M e m o r y c a r d .
M u l t i t a s k i n g
T i p : To ensure that you have adequate memory,
transfer data regularly to a memory card or
computer, or use File manager to delete files you
no longer need.
You can have several applications open at the same
time. To switch between active applications, press and
hold the home key, scroll to an application, and press
the scroll key. To close the selected application, press
the backspace key.
After you install applications to a compatible memory
card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device
memory. The files may use large amounts of memory
and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain
sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up
installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file
manager to remove the installation files from the
device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment,
delete the message from the Messaging inbox.
E x a m p l e : When you have an active phone call
and want to check your calendar, press the home
key to access the menu, and open the Calendar
application. The phone call remains active in the
background.
E x a m p l e : When you are writing a message and
2 8
want to check a web site, press the home key to
M e m o r y c a r d
Select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y .
If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you
may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may
not be formatted for your device, or the card has a
corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the
FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards.
2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the contact
area first. Make sure that the contact area is facing
the connectors on the device.
M i c r o S D
This device uses a microSD memory card.
To ensure interoperability, use only
compatible microSD cards with this device.
Check the compatibility of a microSD card with its
manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than
microSD cards are not compatible with this device.
Using an incompatible memory card may damage the
memory card as well as the device, and data stored on
the incompatible card may be corrupted.
3. Push the card in until it locks into place.
4. Close the back cover.
I n s e r t t h e m e m o r y c a r d
Use a memory card to save the memory on your device.
You can also back up information from your device to
the memory card.
U s e a m e m o r y c a r d
To format a memory card for your device, select
O p t i o n s > F o r m a t m e m o r y c a r d . When a memory
card is formatted, all data on the card is lost
The sales package of your device may not include a
memory card. Memory cards are available as separate
enhancements.
permanently. Consult your retailer to find out if you
must format the memory card before you can use it.
1. With the back of the device facing you, press the
release button (1) and slide the back cover off (2).
To change the name of the memory card, select
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y c a r d n a m e .
You can protect a memory card with a password to
2 9
prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, select
O p t i o n s > S e t p a s s w o r d . The password can be up to
eight characters long and is case-sensitive. The
password is stored in your device. You do not need to
enter it again while you use the memory card in the
same device. If you use the memory card in another
device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory
cards support password protection.
W r i t e t e x t
The input methods provided in the device may vary
according to different sales markets.
T r a d i t i o n a l t e x t i n p u t
To remove the memory card password, select
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e p a s s w o r d . When you remove the
password, the data on the memory card is not
protected against unauthorised use.
is shown on the top right of the display when
you are writing text using traditional text input.
and
indicate the selected case.
indicates that the first letter of the sentence is written
in uppercase and all the other letters are automatically
To open a locked memory card, select O p t i o n s >
U n l o c k m e m o r y c a r d . Enter the password.
written in lowercase.
indicates the number
E j e c t t h e m e m o r y c a r d
mode.
To write text with the keypad, press a number key
2 - 9 repeatedly until the desired character appears.
There are more characters available for a number key
than are printed on the key. If the next letter is located
on the same key as the present one, wait until the
cursor appears, and enter the letter.
I m p o r t a n t : Do not remove the memory card in
the middle of an operation when the card is being
accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an
operation may damage the memory card as well as the
device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted.
1. Press the power key briefly, and select R e m o v e
To insert a number, press and hold the number key.
m e m o r y c a r d .
To switch between the upper and lower case mode and
2. Press the release button and slide off the back
the number mode, press # .
cover.
To erase a character, press the backspace key. Press and
hold the backspace key to erase more than one
character.
3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from
the memory card slot.
4. Close the back cover.
To access the most common punctuation marks, press
the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to reach the desired
punctuation mark.
3 0
To add special characters, press * . Scroll to the desired To switch predictive text input off for all editors in the
character and press the scroll key.
device, press # twice quickly.
To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cursor to the
next line, press 0 three times.
C h a n g e t h e w r i t i n g
l a n g u a g e
To switch between the different character cases, press
# .
When you are writing text, you can change the writing
language. For example, if you press the 6 key
repeatedly to reach a specific character, changing the
writing language gives you access to characters in a
different order.
P r e d i c t i v e t e x t i n p u t
1. To activate predictive text input, press # twice
quickly. This activates predictive text input for all
editors in the device. The indicator
on the display.
is shown
If you are writing text using a non-Latin alphabet and
want to write Latin characters, for example e-mail or
web addresses, you may need to change the writing
language. To change the writing language, select
O p t i o n s > W r i t i n g l a n g u a g e , and a writing
language that uses Latin characters.
2. To write the desired word, press 2 - 9 . Press each key
only once for one letter.
3. When you have finished writing the word and it is
correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add
a space.
If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view
A n t e n n a s
the matching words the dictionary has found.
If the ? character is shown after the word, the word
you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To
add a word to the dictionary, select S p e l l , enter the
word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input,
and select O K . The word is added to the dictionary.
When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces
the oldest added word.
N o t e : Your device may have internal and
external antennas. As with any radio transmitting
device, avoid touching the antenna unnecessarily
when the antenna is in use. Contact with such an
antenna affects the communication quality, may cause
the device to operate at a higher power level than
otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life.
Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it,
scroll right. Write the last part of the compound word.
To complete the compound word, press 0 to add a
space.
3 1
F u r t h e r i n f o r m a t i o n
E x t e n d e d u s e r g u i d e
An extended version of this user guide is available on
the Nokia web site. Some applications or functions are
explained only in the extended user guide.
I n s t r u c t i o n s i n y o u r d e v i c e
To read instructions for the current view of the open
application, select O p t i o n s > H e l p .
To browse the help topics and conduct searches, select
M e n u > H e l p > H e l p . You can select categories for
which you want to see instructions. Select a category,
such as Messaging, to see what instructions (help
topics) are available. While you are reading the topic,
scroll left or right to see the other topics in that
category.
To switch between the application and help, press and
hold the home key.
T u t o r i a l
The tutorial provides you information about your
device and shows you how to use it. Select M e n u >
H e l p > T u t o r i a l .
3 2
B u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s
Your device provides you with efficient tools for voice
communication and contact and time management.
To mute the ringing tone instead of answering a call,
select S i l e n c e .
When you have an active call and the call waiting
function (network service) is activated, press the call
key to answer a new incoming call. The first call is put
on hold. To end the active call, press the end key.
T e l e p h o n e
To make and receive calls, the device must be switched
on, the device must have a valid SIM card installed, and
you must be located in the service area of a cellular
network.
M a k e a c a l l
I m p o r t a n t : If the device has been locked, enter
the lock code to activate the phone function. When the
device is locked, calls may be possible to the official
emergency number. Making an emergency call in the
offline profile or when the device is locked requires
that the device recognise the number to be an official
emergency number. It is advisable to change the
profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code
before you make the emergency call.
To make or receive a net call, your device must be
connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call
service, your device must be in the coverage of a
connection network, such as a WLAN access point.
V o i c e c a l l s
N o t e : The actual invoice for calls and services
from your service provider may vary, depending on
network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and
so forth.
To make a call, enter the phone number, including the
area code, and press the call key.
T i p : For international calls, add the + character
that replaces the international access code, and
enter the country code, area code (omit the
leading 0, if necessary), and phone number.
A n s w e r a c a l l
To answer a call, press the call key.
To reject a call, press the end key.
To end the call or cancel the call attempt, press the end
3 3
key.
To make a call using the saved contacts, select
C o n t a c t s in the standby mode. Enter the first letters of
the name, scroll to the name, and press the call key.
See "Contacts," p. 42.
F a x c a l l s
To make and receive fax calls, connect your device to a
compatible computer or fax machine. To activate the
fax modem, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e m o d e m . You
can answer incoming fax calls only from the computer
or fax machine connected to your device.
To make a call using the log, press the call key to view
up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to
call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press
the call key. See "Log," p. 41.
To reject an incoming fax call, select O p t i o n s >
R e j e c t .
To adjust the volume of an active call, use the volume
To reject a call while a fax call is in progress, select
keys.
R e j e c t .
To switch from a voice call to a video call, select
O p t i o n s > S w i t c h t o v i d e o c a l l . The device ends the
voice call and makes a video call to the recipient.
A fax call cannot be put on hold.
V i d e o c a l l s
M a k e a c o n f e r e n c e c a l l
To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the
coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and
subscription to video call services, contact your
network operator or service provider. While talking,
you can see a real-time, two-way video between you
and the recipient of the call, if the recipient has a
compatible mobile phone. The video image captured
by the camera in your device is shown to the video call
recipient. A video call can only be made between two
parties.
1. To make a conference call, enter a participant's
phone number, and press the call key.
2. When the participant answers, select O p t i o n s >
N e w c a l l .
3. When you have made a phone call to all the
participants, select O p t i o n s > C o n f e r e n c e to
merge the calls into a conference call.
To mute the microphone of your device during the call,
select O p t i o n s > M u t e .
To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to
D r o p p a r t i c i p a n t .
M a k e a v i d e o c a l l
W a r n i n g : Do not hold the device near your ear
when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume
may be extremely loud.
To discuss privately with a conference call participant,
scroll to the participant, and select O p t i o n s >
C o n f e r e n c e > P r i v a t e .
To make a video call, enter the phone number or select
3 4
the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select
O p t i o n s > C a l l > V i d e o c a l l . When the video call
starts, the camera of the device is activated. If the
camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If
the recipient of the call does not want to send a video
back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can
define the still image in M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >
P h o n e > C a l l > I m a g e i n v i d e o c a l l .
To disable the sending of audio, video, or video and
audio, select O p t i o n s > D i s a b l e > S e n d i n g a u d i o ,
S e n d i n g v i d e o , or S e n d i n g a u d . & v i d e o .
2. To send live video or a video clip from your device,
select O p t i o n s > S h a r e v i d e o > L i v e or C l i p . To
preview the clip, select O p t i o n s > P l a y .
3. Select the recipient from Contacts, or enter the
recipient's SIP address manually to send an
invitation to the recipient. Sharing begins
automatically when the recipient accepts the video
sharing.
4. To end sharing the video, select S t o p . The voice call
continues normally.
To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select
O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e l o u d s p e a k e r . To mute the
loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select O p t i o n s >
A c t i v a t e h a n d s e t .
R e c e i v e a v i d e o s h a r i n g i n v i t a t i o n
When you receive a video sharing invitation, a message
is displayed showing the caller's name or SIP address.
To swap the places of images, select O p t i o n s >
To accept the invitation and begin the sharing session,
C h a n g e i m a g e o r d e r .
select A c c e p t .
To zoom the image on the display, select O p t i o n s >
To reject the invitation, select R e j e c t . The voice call
Z o o m i n or Z o o m o u t .
continues normally.
To end the video call and make a new voice call to the
same recipient, select O p t i o n s > S w i t c h t o v o i c e
c a l l .
N e t c a l l s
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n t e r n e t t e l . .
S h a r e a v i d e o
Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net
calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily
over cellular networks. If an emergency call using
cellular networks is not successful, your device
attempts an emergency call through your net call
provider. Due to the established nature of cellular
telephony, you should use cellular networks for
emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular
network coverage available, make sure that your
cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls
Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video
or a video clip from your mobile device to another
compatible mobile device during a voice call.
1. Make a phone call to the selected recipient. You can
start sharing a video once the phone call is
established and your device has been registered to
the SIP server.
3 5
before you attempt an emergency call. The capability
for an emergency call using internet telephony
To login to the net call service manually, select
R e g i s t r a t i o n > W h e n n e e d e d in the SIP settings
depends on the availability of a WLAN and your net call when creating a net call profile.
provider's implementation of emergency call
To make secure net calls, ask your service provider for
capabilities. Contact your net call provider to check the
secure net call settings. The proxy server selected for
internet telephony emergency call capability.
the net call profile must support secure net calls.
With the net call service (network service), you can
make and receive calls over the internet using the VoIP
(voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can
be established between computers, between mobile
phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional
telephone. To make or receive a net call, your device
must be within WLAN coverage, for example. The
availability of the net call service may vary according
to your country or area.
C o n n e c t t o t h e n e t c a l l s e r v i c e
To make or receive a net call, your device must be
connected to a net call service. If you have selected
automatic login, your device automatically connects to
the net call service. If you login to the service manually,
select an available network from the list and S e l e c t .
The list of networks is refreshed automatically every 15
seconds. To refresh the list manually, select O p t i o n s >
R e f r e s h . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on
the list.
To select a net call service for outgoing calls if the
device is connected to more than one service, select
O p t i o n s > C h a n g e s e r v i c e .
To configure new services, select O p t i o n s >
C o n f i g u r e s e r v i c e . This option is shown only if there
are services that have not been configured.
C r e a t e a n e t c a l l p r o f i l e
Before you can make net calls, you need to create a net
call profile.
1. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >
C o n n e c t i o n > S I P s e t t i n g s > O p t i o n s > N e w
S I P p r o f i l e , and enter the required information. To
make the login to the net call service automatic,
select R e g i s t r a t i o n > A l w a y s o n . Contact your net
call provider for the correct settings.
To save the network to which you are currently
connected, select O p t i o n s > S a v e n e t w o r k . The
saved networks are marked with a star on the list of
networks.
2. Select B a c k until you return to the C o n n e c t i o n
settings main view.
3. Select I n t e r n e t t e l . > O p t i o n s > N e w p r o f i l e .
Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP
profile you just created.
To connect to a net call service using a hidden WLAN,
select O p t i o n s > U s e h i d d e n n e t w o r k .
To set the created profile to be used automatically
when connecting to the net call service, select M e n u >
C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n t e r n e t t e l . > P r e f e r r e d p r o f i l e .
To end the connection to a net call service, select
3 6
O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t f r o m s e r v . .
To define the service-specific settings, select E d i t
s e r v i c e s e t t i n g s . This option is only available if a
service-specific software plug-in has been installed in
the device.
M a k e n e t c a l l s
You can make a net call from all applications where you
can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts,
scroll to the desired contact, and select C a l l > I n t e r n e t
c a l l .
S p e e d d i a l l i n g
To make a net call in the standby mode, enter the SIP
address, and press the call key.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l >
S p e e d d i a l l i n g > O n .
To make a net call to an address that does not start with
a digit, press any number key when the device is in the
standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear
the display and to switch the device from the number
mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press
the call key.
Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing
and holding a number key in the standby mode.
To assign a number key to a phone number, select
M e n u > T o o l s > S p e e d d i a l . Scroll to the number key
(2 - 9) on the display, and select O p t i o n s > A s s i g n .
Select the desired number from Contacts.
To set net call as the preferred call type for outgoing
calls, select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n t e r n e t t e l . >
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > D e f a u l t c a l l t y p e > I n t e r n e t
c a l l . When your device is connected to a net call service,
all calls are made as net calls.
To delete the phone number assigned to a number key,
scroll to the speed dialling key, and select O p t i o n s >
R e m o v e .
To modify a phone number assigned to a number key,
scroll to the speed dialling key, and select O p t i o n s >
C h a n g e .
N e t c a l l s e r v i c e s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e t t i n g s : .
To login automatically to the net call service, select
L o g i n t y p e > A u t o m a t i c . If you use the automatic
login type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for
WLANs, which increases the demand on battery power
and reduces the battery life.
C a l l d i v e r t
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l
d i v e r t .
Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to
another phone number. For details, contact your
service provider.
To login manually to the net call service, select L o g i n
t y p e > M a n u a l .
To view the networks you have saved for the net call
service and the networks detected by the net call
service, select S a v e d c o n n . n e t w o r k s .
Select to divert voice or fax calls, and select from the
3 7
following options:
•
•
•
A l l v o i c e c a l l s or A l l f a x c a l l s — Divert all incoming you need the barring password from your service
provider. Call barring affects all call types.
voice or fax calls.
I f b u s y — Divert incoming calls when you have an
active call.
Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the
same time.
I f n o t a n s w e r e d — Divert incoming calls after your
device rings for a specified period of time. Select the
time you let the device ring before diverting the call
in the D e l a y t i m e : list.
When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain
official emergency numbers.
To bar calls, select V o i c e c a l l b a r r i n g and from the
following options:
•
•
I f o u t o f r e a c h — Divert calls when the device is
switched off or out of network coverage.
I f n o t a v a i l a b l e — Activate the last three settings
at the same time. This option diverts calls if your
device is busy, not answered, or out of reach.
•
O u t g o i n g c a l l s — Prevent making voice calls with
your device.
•
•
I n c o m i n g c a l l s — Prevent incoming calls.
I n t e r n a t i o n a l c a l l s — Prevent calling to foreign
countries or regions.
To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type
and a diverting option, then select O p t i o n s >
A c t i v a t e > T o v o i c e m a i l b o x .
•
•
I n c o m i n g c a l l s w h e n a b r o a d — Prevent incoming
calls when outside your home country.
I n t e r n a t i o n a l c a l l s e x c e p t t o h o m e
c o u n t r y — Prevent calls to foreign countries or
regions, but allow calls to your home country.
To divert calls to another phone number, select a call
type and a diverting option, then select O p t i o n s >
A c t i v a t e > D i v e r t e d t o : . Enter a number in the
N u m b e r : field, or select F i n d to retrieve a number
saved in Contacts.
To check the status of voice call barrings, select the
barring option and O p t i o n s > C h e c k s t a t u s .
To stop all voice call barrings, select a barring option
To check the current diverting status, scroll to the
and O p t i o n s > C a n c e l a l l b a r r i n g s .
diverting option, and select O p t i o n s > C h e c k s t a t u s .
To change the password used for barring voice and fax
calls, select V o i c e c a l l b a r r i n g > O p t i o n s > E d i t
b a r r i n g p a s s w o r d . Enter the current code, then the
new code twice. The barring password must be four
digits long. For details, contact your service provider.
To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option,
and select O p t i o n s > C a n c e l .
C a l l b a r r i n g
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l
b a r r i n g .
B a r n e t c a l l s
You can bar the calls that can be made or received with
3 8
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l
the device (network service). To change the settings,
b a r r i n g > I n t e r n e t c a l l b a r r i n g .
To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select
If you have configured net call settings to your device
and have an internet call mailbox, select I n t e r n e t c a l l
m a i l b o x > O p t i o n s > C a l l v o i c e m a i l b o x to call it.
A n o n y m o u s c a l l b a r r i n g > O n .
To call your voice mail in the standby mode, press and
hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have
defined an internet call mailbox, select whether you
want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox.
S e n d D T M F t o n e s
You can send dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones
during an active call to control your voice mailbox or
other automated phone services.
To change the voice mailbox number, select the
S e n d a D T M F t o n e s e q u e n c e
mailbox and O p t i o n s > C h a n g e n u m b e r .
1. Make a call, and wait until the other end answers.
2. Select M e n u > O p t i o n s > S e n d D T M F .
To change the internet call mailbox address, select the
mailbox and O p t i o n s > C h a n g e a d d r e s s .
3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a
predefined sequence.
V o i c e a i d
A t t a c h a D T M F t o n e s e q u e n c e t o a c o n t a c t c a r d
Select M e n u > T o o l s > V o i c e a i d .
1. Select M e n u > C o n t a c t s . Open a contact, and
select O p t i o n s > E d i t > O p t i o n s > A d d d e t a i l >
D T M F .
The Voice aid application reads text on the display,
allowing you to use the basic functions of your device
without looking at the display.
2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a pause of about
2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p .
To set the device to send the DTMF tones only after
you select S e n d D T M F during a call, enter w .
To hear the entries in your contacts list, select
C o n t a c t s . Do not use this option if you have more than
500 contacts.
3. Select D o n e .
To hear information on your missed and received calls,
dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select R e c e n t
c a l l s .
V o i c e m a i l
To listen to your voice messages, select V o i c e
Select M e n u > T o o l s > C a l l m a i l b o x .
m a i l b o x .
When you open the Voice mail application for the first
time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice
mailbox.
To dial a telephone number, select D i a l l e r .
To hear the current time, select C l o c k > T i m e . To hear
the current date, select C l o c k > D a t e .
3 9
To call your voice mail, select O p t i o n s > C a l l v o i c e
m a i l b o x .
To hear more options, select O p t i o n s .
3. The device plays a synthesised voice tag for the
recognised contact in the selected device language,
and displays the name and number. After a timeout
of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the
recognised contact was not correct, select N e x t to
view a list of other matches or Q u i t to cancel
dialling.
V o i c e c o m m a n d s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > V o i c e c o m m . .
Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch
If several numbers are saved under the contact, the
device selects the default number, if it has been set.
Otherwise, the device selects the first available
number of the following fields: M o b i l e , M o b i l e
( h o m e ) , M o b i l e ( b u s i n e s s ) , T e l e p h o n e , T e l .
( h o m e ) , and T e l . ( b u s i n e s s ) .
applications, profiles, or other functions on the device.
The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts
and for the functions designated in the Voice
commands application. When a voice command is
spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the
voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not
dependent on a speaker’s voice; however, the voice
recognition in the device adapts to the main user’s
voice to recognise voice commands better.
L a u n c h a n a p p l i c a t i o n
The device creates voice tags for the applications listed
in the Voice commands application.
M a k e a c a l l
To launch an application using a voice command, press
and hold the voice key, and clearly speak the name of
the application. If the recognised application was not
correct, select N e x t to view a list of other matches or
Q u i t to cancel.
A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that
is saved on the contact in Contacts.
N o t e : Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy
environment or during an emergency, so you should
not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances.
To add more applications to the list, select O p t i o n s >
N e w a p p l i c a t i o n .
To listen to a voice tag, open a contact, and select
To change the voice command of an application, select
O p t i o n s > C h a n g e c o m m a n d , and enter the new
command.
O p t i o n s > P l a y v o i c e t a g .
1. To make a call using a voice command, press and
hold the voice key.
2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display,
clearly speak the name saved on the contact.
4 0
T i p : To open D i a l l e d n u m b e r s in the standby
C h a n g e p r o f i l e s
modes, press the call key.
The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set
on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the
voice key, and say the name of the profile.
To view the approximate duration of calls to and from
your device, select C a l l d u r a t i o n .
To view the amount of data transferred during packet
To change the voice command, select P r o f i l e s >
data connections, select P a c k e t d a t a .
O p t i o n s > C h a n g e c o m m a n d .
M o n i t o r a l l c o m m u n i c a t i o n s
V o i c e c o m m a n d s e t t i n g s
To switch off the synthesiser that plays recognised
voice commands in the selected device language,
select S e t t i n g s > S y n t h e s i s e r > O f f .
To reset voice recognition learning when the main user
of the device has changed, select R e m o v e v o i c e
a d a p t s . .
To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data
connections registered by the device, open the general
log tab.
To view detailed information about a communication
event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.
T i p : Subevents, such as a text message sent in
more than one part and packet data
connections, are logged as one communication
event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia
messaging centre, or web pages are shown as
packet data connections.
L o g
Select M e n u > L o g .
Log stores information about the communication
history of the device. The device registers missed and
received calls only if the network supports these
functions, the device is switched on and within the
network service area.
To add the phone number from a communication event
to Contacts, select O p t i o n s > S a v e t o C o n t a c t s , and
select to create a new contact or to add the phone
number to an existing contact.
To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text
message, select O p t i o n s > C o p y n u m b e r .
C a l l a n d d a t a r e g i s t e r s
To view a single type of communication event or
communication events with one other party, select
O p t i o n s > F i l t e r , and select the desired filter.
To view recently missed, received, and dialled calls,
select R e c e n t c a l l s .
4 1
To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register,
and messaging delivery reports permanently, select
O p t i o n s > C l e a r l o g .
messages to many recipients at the same time. You can
add received contact information (business cards) to
Contacts. Contact information can only be sent to or
received from compatible devices.
C a l l a n d s e n d m e s s a g e s f r o m
L o g
To call back a caller, select R e c e n t c a l l s and open
M i s s e d c a l l s , R e c e i v e d c a l l s , or D i a l l e d n u m b e r s .
Select the caller, and O p t i o n s > C a l l .
C o p y c o n t a c t s b e t w e e n S I M
a n d d e v i c e m e m o r y
If you already have contacts saved on your SIM card,
you can copy them to the device memory.
To reply to a caller with a message, select R e c e n t
c a l l s and open M i s s e d c a l l s , R e c e i v e d c a l l s , or D i a l l e d
n u m b e r s . Select the caller, and select O p t i o n s >
C r e a t e m e s s a g e . You can send text messages and
multimedia messages.
To copy contacts from a SIM card to the device memory,
select O p t i o n s > S I M c o n t a c t s > S I M d i r e c t o r y . Mark
the contacts to copy, or select O p t i o n s > M a r k /
U n m a r k > M a r k a l l to copy all contacts. Select
O p t i o n s > C o p y t o C o n t a c t s .
To copy contacts from the device memory to a SIM card,
select O p t i o n s > C o p y t o S I M d i r e c t o r y . Mark the
contacts you want to copy, or select O p t i o n s > M a r k /
U n m a r k > M a r k a l l to copy all contacts. Select
O p t i o n s > C o p y t o S I M d i r e c t o r y .
L o g s e t t i n g s
To set the time for keeping all communication events
in the log, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > L o g
d u r a t i o n , and the time. If you select N o l o g , all log
contents are permanently deleted.
T i p : If you have saved contacts on your previous
device, you can use the Transfer application to
copy them. See "Transfer content between
devices," p. 23.
C o n t a c t s
Select M e n u > C o n t a c t s .
M a n a g e c o n t a c t s
You can save and update contact information, such as
phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses
of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone
or a thumbnail image to a contact. You can also create
contact groups, which allow you to send text or e-mail
To add a new contact, select O p t i o n s > N e w
c o n t a c t .
4 2
To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact, select To change the display order of the first and last names
O p t i o n s > E d i t > O p t i o n s > A d d t h u m b n a i l . The
of your contacts, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s , and L a s t
thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls.
n a m e F i r s t n a m e , or F i r s t n a m e L a s t n a m e .
To listen to the voice tag assigned to the contact, select
O p t i o n s > P l a y v o i c e t a g .
M a n a g e c o n t a c t g r o u p s
To search for a contact, enter the first letters of the
name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting
with the letters appear on the display.
You can create a contact group so that you can send
messages to several recipients at the same time.
1. Open the contact groups tab, and select O p t i o n s >
To edit information in a contact, select O p t i o n s >
N e w g r o u p .
E d i t .
2. Enter a name for the group, and select O K .
T i p : You can also use Nokia PC Suite to add and
3. Open the group, and select O p t i o n s > A d d
edit contacts.
m e m b e r s .
To send contact information, select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
4. Scroll to each contact you want to add to the group,
and press the scroll key to mark it.
You can assign a default number or address to a contact
so you can easily call or send a message to the default
number or address, even if several numbers or
addresses are saved to that contact. The default
number is also used in voice dialling.
5. Select O K to add all marked contacts to the group.
To remove a contact from a contact group, scroll to the
contact that you want to remove, and select O p t i o n s >
R e m o v e f r o m g r o u p .
To change the default information for a contact, open
the contact, and select O p t i o n s > D e f a u l t s . Select the
number or address you want to set as a default. The
default number or address is underlined in the contact.
A d d r i n g i n g t o n e s f o r
c o n t a c t s
You can select a ringing tone for a contact or contact
group. If the caller's phone number is sent with the
incoming call and your device recognises the number,
the ringing tone plays when the contact calls you.
To select a ringing tone for a contact or contact group,
open the contact or contact group, and select
O p t i o n s > R i n g i n g t o n e . A list of ringing tones opens.
Select the ringing tone you want to use.
To add a contact to a group, select O p t i o n s > A d d t o
g r o u p (shown only if you have created a group).
T i p : To check to which groups a contact belongs,
select O p t i o n s > B e l o n g s t o g r o u p s .
To add a speed dial key to the contact's phone number,
select O p t i o n s > A s s i g n s p e e d d i a l .
4 3
To remove the assigned ringing tone, select D e f a u l t
To add contacts to your SIM directory, select O p t i o n s >
N e w S I M c o n t a c t . Enter the contact information and
select D o n e .
t o n e from the list of ringing tones.
To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select
O p t i o n s > S I M c o n t a c t s > F i x e d d i a l c o n t a c t s . This
setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card.
To restrict calls from your device to selected phone
numbers, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e f i x e d d i a l l i n g .
You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate
fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts.
Contact your service provider if you do not have the
code.
S e n d b u s i n e s s c a r d s
To send a business card, select the contact from
Contacts, select O p t i o n s > S e n d , and the sending
method. Enter the phone number or address, or add a
recipient from Contacts. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d . If you
select text message as the sending method, business
cards are sent without thumbnail images.
To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select
O p t i o n s > N e w S I M c o n t a c t . You need the PIN2 code
for this function. When you use fixed dialling, packet
data connections are not possible, except when
sending text messages over a packet data connection.
In this case, the message centre number and the
recipient's phone number must be included on the
fixed dialling list. When fixed dialling is activated, calls
may be possible to the official emergency number
programmed into your device.
M a n a g e r e c e i v e d b u s i n e s s
c a r d s
To view a received business card, select O p e n from the
displayed notification, or open the message from the
Inbox folder in the Messaging application.
To save a received business card, select > S a v e
b u s i n e s s c a r d .
To view your own numbers, if stored on the SIM card,
select O p t i o n s > M y n u m b e r s . For example, you may
have subscribed to two phone lines with the same SIM
card. Not all SIM cards contain your own numbers.
S I M d i r e c t o r y
Select O p t i o n s > S I M c o n t a c t s > S I M d i r e c t o r y .
In the SIM directory, you can see the names and
numbers stored on the SIM card; add, edit, or copy
numbers to contacts; and make calls.
To edit the contact information, select O p t i o n s >
E d i t .
To view a SIM contact, scroll to it, and press the scroll
To copy the contact from the SIM directory to Contacts,
key.
select O p t i o n s > C o p y t o C o n t a c t s .
4 4
To check the amount of free memory on your SIM card,
select O p t i o n s > S I M c a r d d e t a i l s .
•
S t a r t d a t e or D a t e — Enter the start date or date
the event occurs.
C a l e n d a r
•
•
E n d d a t e — Enter the end date.
Select M e n u > C a l e n d a r .
A l a r m — Set an alarm for meeting and anniversary
entries. The alarm is displayed in the day view.
R e p e a t — Specify whether you want the entry to be
repeated and when. Define the repeat type,
frequency, and possible ending date.
You can create and view scheduled events and
appointments. You can also set alarms for calendar
entries. To synchronise your calendar data with a
compatible computer, use Nokia PC Suite. See the Nokia
PC Suite guide.
•
•
S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n — If you select P r i v a t e , the
calendar entry can be seen only by you and is not
shown to others with online access to view the
calendar. If you select P u b l i c , the calendar entry is
shown to others who have access to view your
calendar online. If you select N o n e , the calendar
entry is not copied to your computer when you
synchronise.
C r e a t e c a l e n d a r e n t r i e s
You can create the following types of calendar entries:
•
•
M e e t i n g entries have a specific date and time.
M e m o entries are related to the whole day but not
to a specific time of the day.
T i p : Make sure you have selected the correct city
in the Clock application, because scheduled
calendar entries may change when the current
city is changed and is on another time zone.
•
A n n i v e r s a r y entries remind you of birthdays and
special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a
specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are
repeated every year.
To edit an existing entry, scroll to the entry, and select
•
T o - d o entries remind you of a task that has a due
O p t i o n s > O p e n . Edit the details in the various fields.
date but not a specific time of the day.
To delete a calendar entry, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e ,
and select B e f o r e d a t e to delete all entries before the
selected date, or A l l e n t r i e s to delete all calendar
entries from the device.
To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, and select
O p t i o n s > N e w e n t r y . Select the entry type. The
available settings for meeting, memo, anniversary, and
to-do entries vary.
T i p : When you edit or delete a repeated entry,
choose how you want the change to take effect.
If you select A l l c a l e n d a r e n t r i e s d e l e t e d , all
repeated entries are deleted. If you select D e l e t e
e n t r y , only the current entry is deleted.
Select from the following:
•
S u b j e c t or O c c a s i o n — Enter a description for the
entry.
•
•
•
L o c a t i o n — Enter the location information.
S t a r t t i m e — Enter the start time.
E n d t i m e — Enter the end time.
4 5
To send a calendar entry to a compatible device, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d > V i a t e x t m e s s a g e , V i a
m u l t i m e d i a , V i a e - m a i l , V i a B l u e t o o t h , or V i a
i n f r a r e d . If the other device is not compatible with
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time
information of received calendar entries may not be
displayed correctly.
online, or N o n e to prevent copying the entry to
your computer when you synchronise.
T o - d o e n t r i e s
You can create and maintain a task or list of tasks that
must be done by a certain day. Each task can be
To add a received calendar entry to your calendar, open assigned a due date, and an alarm.
the calendar entry attachment in the message, and
C r e a t e a t o - d o e n t r y
select O p t i o n s > S a v e t o C a l e n d a r .
1. Scroll to a date, and select O p t i o n s > N e w
To respond to a received calendar entry, select
A c c e p t , T e n t a t i v e , or D e c l i n e , if available. If you
accept the entry or mark it as tentative, the entry is
added to your calendar. You can send a response to the
sender of the calendar entry by e-mail. Select Y e s , and
the message is saved in Outbox to wait for sending.
e n t r y > T o - d o .
2. Enter the subject in the S u b j e c t field.
3. Enter the due date.
4. To set an alarm for the to-do entry, select A l a r m >
O n . Enter the alarm time and date.
5. Specify a priority. The priority icons are ( ! ) H i g h
and ( - ) L o w . There is no icon for N o r m a l .
C r e a t e a m e e t i n g e n t r y
6. Define how the entry is handled during
synchronisation in the S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n field.
Select P r i v a t e to hide the entry from viewers if the
calendar is available online, P u b l i c to make the
entry visible to viewers if the calendar is available
online, or N o n e to not copy the entry to your
computer when you synchronise.
1. Scroll to a date, and select O p t i o n s > N e w
e n t r y > M e e t i n g .
2. Enter the subject, location, start and end time, and
the start and end dates, if needed.
3. To set an alarm for the meeting, select A l a r m >
O n . Enter the alarm time and date.
4. Select whether this is a repeating meeting.
5. Define how the entry is handled during
C a l e n d a r v i e w s
synchronisation in the S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n field.
Select P r i v a t e to hide the entry from viewers if the
calendar is available online, P u b l i c to make the
entry visible to viewers if the calendar is available
The Calendar has four views: in the month view, you
can see the entire month at one time; the week view
shows the events for the selected week in seven day
boxes; the day view shows the events for the selected
4 6
day; and the to-do view shows the to-do items for the
selected day.
D a y v i e w
Select O p t i o n s > D a y v i e w .
W o r k i n d i f f e r e n t v i e w s
The day view shows the events for the selected day.
Entries are grouped into time slots according to their
starting time. To view the previous or next day, scroll
left or right.
To switch between the different calendar views, select
O p t i o n s in any calendar view. Select the type of view
from the list.
To set the default calendar view, select O p t i o n s >
T o - d o v i e w
S e t t i n g s > D e f a u l t v i e w , and the view you want.
Select O p t i o n s > T o - d o v i e w .
To view a specific date, select O p t i o n s > G o t o d a t e ,
The to-do view shows the to-do items for the selected
and enter the date.
day.
To mark a task as completed, select O p t i o n s > M a r k
M o n t h v i e w
Select O p t i o n s > M o n t h v i e w .
a s d o n e .
To restore a task, select O p t i o n s > M a r k a s n o t
In the month view, you can see the entire month at one
time. Each row shows one week of dates. The active
month is displayed, and the active day is either today
or the last day that was viewed. The active day is
marked with a coloured square. Days that have
scheduled events are marked with a small triangle.
Press the scroll key to open the day's entry.
d o n e .
C a l e n d a r s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
To change the alarm tone, select C a l e n d a r a l a r m
t o n e .
W e e k v i e w
Select O p t i o n s > W e e k v i e w .
To change the view displayed when you open the
calendar, select D e f a u l t v i e w .
The week view shows the events for the selected week
in seven day boxes. Today's date is marked with a
coloured square. Memos and anniversaries are placed
before 8:00 a.m.
To change the first day of the week, select W e e k s t a r t s
o n .
To change the week view title, select W e e k v i e w
t i t l e and W e e k n u m b e r or W e e k d a t e s .
To change the starting day of the week, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > W e e k s t a r t s o n .
4 7
transmission between the gateway and the content
server.
W e b
Security certificates may be required for some services,
such as banking services. You are notified if the identity
of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the
correct security certificate in your device. For more
information, contact your service provider.
Select M e n u > W e b .
To browse the web (network service), you need to
configure the internet access point settings. If you are
using a GPRS connection, your wireless network must
support GPRS, and the service must be activated for
your SIM card.
T i p : You may receive the internet access point
settings from your service provider as a special
text message or from the service provider's web
pages. You can also enter the internet access
point settings manually. See "Internet access
points," p. 97.
B r o w s e t h e w e b
To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web
address manually, and select G o t o . Use only services
that you trust and that offer adequate security and
protection against harmful software.
T i p : When you start to enter the address, the
addresses of the pages you have previously
visited that match your input are displayed. To
open a page, scroll to its address, and press the
scroll key.
your service provider. Service providers also give you
instructions on how to use their services.
If the web page is unreadable or not supported and
garbage code is found while browsing, you can try to
select M e n u > W e b > O p t i o n s > P a g e > D e f a u l t
e n c o d i n g , and select a corresponding encoding.
To move on a web page, use the scroll key, which is
shown as a pointer on the page. When you move the
pointer over a link, the pointer changes into a hand.
Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page,
new links usually appear underlined in blue and
previously visited links in purple. Images that act as
links have a blue border around them.
C o n n e c t i o n s e c u r i t y
connection, the data transmission between the device
and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The
security icon does not indicate that the data
The addresses of the pages you visit are saved in the
A u t o . b o o k m a r k s folder.
transmission between the gateway and the content
server (or place where the requested resource is
stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data
4 8
B o o k m a r k s
F e e d s a n d b l o g s
Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links Select M e n u > W e b > W e b f e e d s .
for third-party internet sites. You may also access other
third-party sites through your device. Third-party sites
are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not
endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to
access such sites, you should take precautions for
security or content.
Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often
about recent news or other topics. Blog is a shortening
of weblog, which is a continuously updated web diary.
To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and press the
scroll key.
To add or edit a feed or blog, select O p t i o n s > M a n a g e
To view a bookmarked web page, scroll to the
f e e d > N e w f e e d or E d i t .
bookmark, and press the scroll key.
To browse to another web page, select O p t i o n s >
N a v i g a t i o n o p t i o n s > G o t o w e b a d d r e s s , enter the
page address, and select G o t o .
E n d a c o n n e c t i o n
To end the connection and view the browser page
offline, select O p t i o n s > T o o l s > D i s c o n n e c t . To end
the connection and close the browser, select
O p t i o n s > E x i t .
To add a bookmark, select O p t i o n s > B o o k m a r k
m a n a g e r > A d d b o o k m a r k .
To organise your bookmarks, select O p t i o n s >
B o o k m a r k m a n a g e r in the Web main view. You can
move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders.
W e b s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > W e b > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
C l e a r t h e c a c h e
The Web settings are divided into four groups:
A cache is a memory location that is used to store data
temporarily. If you have tried to access or have
accessed confidential information requiring
passwords, empty the cache after each use. The
information or services you have accessed are stored
in the cache.
•
G e n e r a l contains access point and home page
related settings.
•
•
•
P a g e contains imaging, audio, and pop-up settings.
P r i v a c y contains settings related your privacy.
W e b f e e d s contains settings related to web feeds
To empty the cache, select O p t i o n s > C l e a r p r i v a c y
and blogs.
d a t a > C l e a r c a c h e .
4 9
M e s s a g i n g
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .
If not, you may need to define the settings manually;
or contact your service provider to configure the
settings.
In Messaging (network service), you can send and
receive text messages, multimedia messages, audio
messages, and e-mail messages. You can also receive
web service messages, cell broadcast messages, and
special messages containing data, and send service
commands.
Messages and data received using Bluetooth
connectivity or infrared are stored in the I n b o x folder.
E-mail messages are stored in M a i l b o x . Messages that
you have been writing can be stored in the D r a f t s
folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored
in the O u t b o x folder, and messages that have been
sent, excluding Bluetooth and infrared messages, are
stored in the S e n t folder.
Before sending or receiving messages, you may need
to do the following:
•
•
Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located
in the service area of a cellular network.
Verify that the network supports the messaging
features you want to use and that they are activated
on your SIM card.
You can also schedule e-mail messages to be
sent the next time you connect to your remote
mailbox.
•
•
•
•
Define the internet access point settings on the
device. See "Internet access points," p. 97.
Define the e-mail account settings on the device. See
"E-mail account settings," p. 62.
Define the text message settings on the device. See
"Text message settings," p. 60.
N o t e : The message sent icon or text on your
device screen does not indicate that the message is
received at the intended destination.
To request the network to send you a delivery report
of the text messages and multimedia messages you
have sent (network service), select O p t i o n s >
Define the multimedia message settings on the
device. See "Multimedia message
settings," p. 61.
The device may recognise the SIM card provider and
5 0
automatically configure some of the message settings.
S e t t i n g s > T e x t m e s s a g e or M u l t i m e d i a
To start reading the next message in Inbox or mailbox,
m e s s a g e > R e c e i v e r e p o r t . The reports are saved in scroll down. To start reading the message again, scroll
the R e p o r t s folder.
up. In the beginning of the message, scroll up to hear
the previous message.
To pause the reading, press the left selection key
briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly
again.
To end the reading, press the end key.
O r g a n i s e m e s s a g e s
To create a new folder to organise your messages,
select M y f o l d e r s > O p t i o n s > N e w f o l d e r .
To rename a folder, select O p t i o n s > R e n a m e
f o l d e r . You can only rename folders that you have
created.
S p e e c h
To move a message to another folder, select O p t i o n s > Select M e n u > T o o l s > S p e e c h .
M o v e t o f o l d e r , the folder, and O K .
With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice
properties for the message reader.
To sort messages in a specific order, select O p t i o n s >
S o r t b y . You can sort the messages by D a t e , S e n d e r ,
S u b j e c t , or M e s s a g e t y p e .
E d i t t h e v o i c e p r o p e r t i e s
To view the properties of a message, select the
To set the language for the message reader, select
L a n g u a g e . To download additional languages to your
device, visit the Nokia web site or use the Download!
application.
message and O p t i o n s > M e s s a g e d e t a i l s .
M e s s a g e r e a d e r
To set the speaking voice, select V o i c e . The voice is
The message reader reads received text, multimedia,
and e-mail messages aloud. The message reader
cannot read e-mail messages in add-on e-mail
applications.
language-dependent.
To set the speaking rate, select V o i c e s e t t i n g s >
S p e e d .
To set the speaking volume, select V o i c e s e t t i n g s >
To play a message, press and hold the left selection key
V o l u m e .
when you receive a message.
To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice,
To start reading a message in Inbox or mailbox, select
and select P l a y v o i c e .
O p t i o n s > L i s t e n .
5 1
1. To start entering the e-mail settings, select S t a r t .
E - m a i l m e s s a g e s
2. In M a i l b o x t y p e , select I M A P 4 or P O P 3 , and select
N e x t .
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > M a i l b o x .
T i p : POP3 is a version of the post office
protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-
mail or internet mail messages from a server.
IMAP4 is a version of the internet message
access protocol that lets you access and
manage e-mail messages while the
messages are still on the e-mail server. You
can then choose which messages to
download to your device.
To receive and send e-mail, you must have a remote
mailbox service. This service may be offered by an
internet service provider, a network service provider,
or your company. Your device is compliant with
internet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (revision 1), and POP3,
and with different vendor-specific e-mail solutions.
Other e-mail providers mayoffer services withdifferent
settings or features than those described in this user
guide. Contact your e-mail provider or service provider
for more details.
3. In M y e - m a i l a d d r e s s , enter your e-mail address.
forward e-mail on your device, you must also do the
following:
Select N e x t .
4. In I n c o m i n g m a i l s e r v e r , enter the name of the
remote server that receives your e-mail, and select
N e x t .
•
Configure an internet access point. See "Internet
access points," p. 97.
5. In O u t g o i n g m a i l s e r v e r , enter the name of the
remote server that sends your e-mail, and select
N e x t . Depending on your mobile operator, you
might have to use your mobile operator's outgoing
mail server instead of your e-mail provider's.
•
Set up an e-mail account, and define the e-mail
settings correctly. To do this, use the mailbox guide,
or define the account manually. See "E-mail account
settings," p. 62.
Contact your service provider for the correct settings.
6. In A c c e s s p o i n t , select the internet access point
your device should use when it retrieves the e-mail.
If youselectA l w a y s a s k , eachtime the devicestarts
to retrieve e-mail, it asks which internet access
point it should use. Select N e x t .
m a i l b o x g u i d e
If youselectM e n u > M e s s a g i n g > M a i l b o x , and have
not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to
do so. To start setting up the e-mail account with the
mailbox guide, select Y e s .
7. Enter a name for your new mailbox, and select
F i n i s h .
When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to
the mailbox replaces M a i l b o x in the Messaging main
view. You can have up to six mailboxes.
5 2
If you have defined several mailboxes, select one of
them as your default mailbox. That mailbox is used
every time you start composing a new e-mail message.
To define the default mailbox, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > E - m a i l > D e f a u l t m a i l b o x and the
mailbox.
R e a d a n d r e p l y t o e - m a i l
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise caution when opening
messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious
software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC.
To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox.
To open an attachment, select O p t i o n s >
A t t a c h m e n t s . Scroll to the attachment, and press the
scroll key.
C o n n e c t t o a r e m o t e m a i l b o x
E-mail addressed to you is not automatically received
by your device, but by your remote mailbox. To read
your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote
mailbox; then select the e-mail messages you wish to
retrieve into your device.
To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select
O p t i o n s > R e p l y > T o s e n d e r .
To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select O p t i o n s >
1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device
and view them, select your mailbox in the
Messaging main view. When the device asks
C o n n e c t t o m a i l b o x ? , select Y e s .
R e p l y > T o a l l .
T i p : If you reply to an e-mail that contains
attached files, the attachments are not included
in the reply. If you forward the received e-mail,
the attachments are included.
2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted.
3. Select O p t i o n s > R e t r i e v e e - m a i l > N e w to
retrieve new messages that you have neither read
nor retrieved, S e l e c t e d to retrieve only messages
you select from the remote mailbox, or A l l to
retrieve all messages not previously retrieved.
To forward an e-mail, select O p t i o n s > F o r w a r d .
To attach a file to an e-mail message, select O p t i o n s >
I n s e r t and the attachment you want to add.
To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are
sending, select the attachment and O p t i o n s >
R e m o v e .
4. To manage your e-mail offline to save in connection
costs and work in conditions that do not allow a
data connection, select O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t to
disconnect from the remote mailbox. Any changes
you make in the remote mailbox folders while
To set the message priority, select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g
o p t i o n s > P r i o r i t y .
offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next To set the sending time for the e-mail message, select
time you go online and synchronise.
O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > S e n d m e s s a g e .
Select I m m e d i a t e l y , or select W h e n c o n n . a v a i l . if
you are working offline.
5 3
To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender To cancel the deleting, select O p t i o n s > R e s t o r e .
can be found in Contacts, select O p t i o n s > C a l l .
To reply to the sender of the e-mail with an audio
S u b f o l d e r s i n y o u r r e m o t e e -
message or multimedia message, select O p t i o n s >
C r e a t e m e s s a g e .
m a i l
If you create subfolders in your IMAP4 mailboxes on a
remote server, you can view and manage these folders
with your device when you subscribe to them. You can
only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes.
To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a
connection, and select O p t i o n s > E - m a i l s e t t i n g s >
R e t r i e v a l s e t t i n g s > F o l d e r s u b s c r i p t i o n s .
W r i t e a n d s e n d e - m a i l
1. To write an e-mail, select N e w m e s s a g e > E -
m a i l .
2. Select O p t i o n s > A d d r e c i p i e n t to select the
recipients' e-mail addresses from Contacts, or enter
thee-mail addresses in the T o field. Use a semicolon
to separate entries. Use the C c field to send a copy
to other recipients, or the B c c field to send a blind
copy to recipients.
To view a remote folder, select a folder and O p t i o n s >
S u b s c r i b e . Every time you go online, the subscribed
folders are updated. This may take some time if the
folders are large.
3. In the S u b j e c t field, enter the subject of the e-mail.
To update the list of folders, select a folder and
4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and
O p t i o n s > U p d a t e f o l d e r l i s t .
select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
D e l e t e m e s s a g e s
To free up memory space on your device, regularly
delete messages from the Inbox and Sent folders, and
delete retrieved e-mail messages.
To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the
original on the server, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e >
P h o n e ( h e a d e r r e m a i n s ) .
To delete e-mail both from the device and the remote
server, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e > P h o n e a n d
s e r v e r .
T e x t m e s s a g e s
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .
W r i t e a n d s e n d t e x t
m e s s a g e s
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .
Your device supports the sending of text messages
beyond the limit for a single message. Longer
messages are sent as two or more messages. Your
5 4
service provider may charge accordingly. Characters
To convert the message to another format, select
with accents or other marks, and characters from some O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > M e s s a g e s e n t a s >
language options, take up more space, and limit the
number of characters that can be sent in a single
message.
T e x t , F a x , P a g i n g , or E - m a i l . Change this option only
if you are sure that your message centre is able to
convert text messages into these other formats.
Contact your service provider.
1. To write a text message, select N e w m e s s a g e >
T e x t m e s s a g e .
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number, or press
the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you
enter more than one number, separate the
numbers with a semicolon.
T e x t m e s s a g e s o n t h e S I M
c a r d
Select O p t i o n s > S I M m e s s a g e s .
3. Enter the text of the message. To use a template,
Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before
you can view SIM messages, you must copy the
messages to a folder in the device. After copying the
messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder
or delete them from the SIM card.
select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t > T e m p l a t e .
4. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
S e n d i n g o p t i o n s f o r t e x t
m e s s a g e s
To select a message centre to send the message, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > M e s s a g e c e n t r e i n
u s e .
1. Select O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k or M a r k
a l l to mark every message.
2. Select O p t i o n s > C o p y .
3. Select a folder and O K to begin copying.
To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you
To have the network send you delivery reports on your copied the messages, and open a message.
messages (network service), select O p t i o n s >
S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > R e c e i v e r e p o r t > Y e s .
V i e w p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s
To define how long the message centre resends your
message (network service) if the first attempt fails,
N o t e : The appearance of a picture message may
select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s > M e s s a g e
v a l i d i t y . If the recipient cannot be reached within the
validity period, the message is deleted from the
message centre.
vary depending on the receiving device.
To view a picture message, open the message from the
Inbox folder.
5 5
To view information about the picture message, select on your device, you must define the multimedia
O p t i o n s > M e s s a g e d e t a i l s .
message settings. Your device may have recognised
the SIM card provider and automatically configured the
multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings
wizard, or contact your service provider for the correct
settings. See "Multimedia message settings," p. 61.
To save a message in a different folder, select
O p t i o n s > M o v e t o f o l d e r .
To add the sender of the message to Contacts, select
O p t i o n s > S a v e t o C o n t a c t s .
C r e a t e a n d s e n d m u l t i m e d i a
m e s s a g e s
F o r w a r d p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s
1. To forward the message, open the message from
the Inbox folder and select O p t i o n s > F o r w a r d .
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise caution when opening
messages. Messages may contain malicious software
or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC.
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number, or press
the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you
enter more than one number, separate the
numbers with a semicolon.
1. To create a new message, select N e w m e s s a g e >
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e .
3. Enter the text of your message. To use a template,
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.
select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t > T e m p l a t e .
4. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
T i p : To remove the picture from the message,
select O p t i o n s > R e m o v e p i c t u r e .
3. In the S u b j e c t field, enter a subject for the
message. To change the fields that are visible,
select O p t i o n s > A d d r e s s f i e l d s .
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s
4. Enter the text of the message, and select O p t i o n s >
I n s e r t o b j e c t to add media objects. You can add
objects such as I m a g e , S o u n d c l i p , or V i d e o c l i p .
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .
Only devices that have compatible features can receive
and display multimedia messages. The appearance of
a message may vary depending on the receiving device.
The wireless network may limit the size of MMS
messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit
the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent
by MMS.
A multimedia message (MMS) can contain text and
objects such as images, sound clips, or video clips.
Before you can send or receive multimedia messages
5 6
5. Each slide of your message can contain only one
video or sound clip. To add more slides to your
message, select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t n e w > S l i d e .
To change the order of slides in your message,
select O p t i o n s > M o v e .
T i p : To add recipients to your reply, select
O p t i o n s > A d d r e c i p i e n t to select the
recipients of the message from Contacts, or
enter the recipients' phone numbers or e-
mail addresses manually in the T o field.
6. To preview a multimedia message before sending
it, select O p t i o n s > P r e v i e w .
7. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
3. Enter the text of the message, and select O p t i o n s >
S e n d .
To delete an object from a multimedia message, select
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .
To set the sending options for the current multimedia
C r e a t e p r e s e n t a t i o n s
message, select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s .
Creating multimedia presentations is not possible if
the M M S c r e a t i o n m o d e setting is set to R e s t r i c t e d .
To change the setting, select M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e > M M S c r e a t i o n
m o d e > F r e e .
R e c e i v e a n d r e p l y t o
m u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s
1. To create a presentation, select N e w m e s s a g e >
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e .
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise caution when opening
messages. Messages may contain malicious software
or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC.
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.
T i p : If you receive multimedia messages that
contain objects unsupported by your device, you
cannot open them. Try to send these objects to
another device such as a computer, and open
them there.
3. Select O p t i o n s > C r e a t e p r e s e n t a t i o n and a
presentation template. A template may define
which media objects you can include in the
presentation, where they appear, and which effects
are displayed between images and slides.
1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the
message, and select O p t i o n s > R e p l y .
4. Scroll to the text area and enter the text.
2. Select O p t i o n s and T o s e n d e r to reply to the sender
with a multimedia message, V i a t e x t m e s s a g e to
reply with a text message, V i a a u d i o m e s s a g e to
reply with an audio message, or V i a e - m a i l to reply
with an e-mail message.
5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your
presentation, scroll to the corresponding object
area, and select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t .
6. To add slides, select I n s e r t > N e w s l i d e .
5 7
To select the background colour for the presentation
and background images for different slides, select
O p t i o n s > B a c k g r o u n d s e t t i n g s .
V i e w a n d s a v e m u l t i m e d i a
a t t a c h m e n t s
To set effects between images or slides, select
To view multimedia messages as complete
presentations, open the message, and select
O p t i o n s > P l a y p r e s e n t a t i o n .
O p t i o n s > E f f e c t s e t t i n g s .
To preview the presentation, select O p t i o n s >
P r e v i e w . Multimedia presentations may only be
viewed in compatible devices that support
presentations. They may appear different in different
devices.
T i p : To view or play a multimedia object in a
multimedia message, select V i e w i m a g e , P l a y
s o u n d c l i p , or P l a y v i d e o c l i p .
To view the name and size of an attachment, open the
message, and select O p t i o n s > O b j e c t s .
V i e w p r e s e n t a t i o n s
To save a multimedia object, select O p t i o n s >
O b j e c t s , the object, and O p t i o n s > S a v e .
To view a presentation, open the multimedia message
from the Inbox folder. Scroll to the presentation, and
press the scroll key.
F o r w a r d a m u l t i m e d i a
m e s s a g e
To pause the presentation, press either selection key.
To resume playing the presentation, select O p t i o n s >
C o n t i n u e .
Open Inbox, scroll to a multimedia notification, and
press the scroll key. To send the message to a
compatible device without retrieving it to your device,
select O p t i o n s > F o r w a r d . If the server does not
support multimedia message forwarding, this option
is not available.
If the text or images are too large to fit on the display,
select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e s c r o l l i n g , and scroll to see
the entire presentation.
To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in
the presentation, select O p t i o n s > F i n d . You may use
these numbers and addresses to make calls, send
messages, or create bookmarks, for example.
1. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.
2. Edit the message, if desired, and select O p t i o n s >
S e n d .
5 8
T i p : To edit the delivery settings of the message,
support this feature. M a x i m u m t i m e is the
select O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s .
maximum amount of time allowed by the network.
S e n d a s o u n d c l i p
S p e c i a l m e s s a g e t y p e s
1. To compose an audio message, select N e w
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .
m e s s a g e > A u d i o m e s s a g e .
You can receive special messages that contain data,
such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or
internet access or e-mail account settings.
2. In the T o field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail
address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient
from Contacts. If you enter more than one number
or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon.
To save the contents of these messages, select
O p t i o n s > S a v e .
3. Select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t s o u n d c l i p , and select
whether to record a sound clip or select one from
Gallery.
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e s
4. Select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
Service messages are sent to your device by service
providers. Service messages may contain notifications
such as news headlines, services, or links through
which the message content can be downloaded.
S e n d i n g o p t i o n s f o r
m u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s
Select N e w m e s s a g e > M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e >
O p t i o n s > S e n d i n g o p t i o n s and from the following
options:
To define the service message settings, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e r v i c e m e s s a g e .
To download the service or message content, select
O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d m e s s a g e .
•
•
R e c e i v e r e p o r t — Select Y e s if you want to receive
To view information about the sender, web address,
expiration date, and other details of the message
before downloading it, select O p t i o n s > M e s s a g e
d e t a i l s .
a notification when the message has been
successfully delivered to the recipient. Receiving a
delivery report of a multimedia message that has
been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible.
M e s s a g e v a l i d i t y — Select how long the messaging
centre tries to send the message. If the recipient of
a message cannot be reached within the validity
period, the message is removed from the
S e n d s e r v i c e c o m m a n d s
You can send a service request message (also known
5 9
as a USSD command) to your service provider and
multimedia messaging centre. The network must
request activation for certain network services. Contact To add, edit, or delete topics, select O p t i o n s >
your service provider for the service request text.
T o p i c .
To send a service request message, select O p t i o n s >
S e r v i c e c o m m a n d . Enter the service request text and
select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
M e s s a g i n g s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
Fill in all fields marked with M u s t b e d e f i n e d or with
C e l l b r o a d c a s t
a red asterisk.
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > C e l l
Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and
configure the correct text message, multimedia
message, and GPRS settings automatically. If not,
contact your service provider for the correct settings,
order the settings from your service provider in a
configuration message, or use the Settings wizard
application.
b r o a d c a s t .
With the cell broadcast network service, you can
receive messages on various topics from your service
provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a
particular region. For available topics and relevant
topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell
broadcast messages cannot be received when the
device is in the remote SIM mode. A packet data (GPRS)
connection may prevent cell broadcast reception.
T e x t m e s s a g e s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > T e x t m e s s a g e .
Select from the following:
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS
(3G) networks.
To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to
set the cell broadcast reception on. Select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > R e c e p t i o n > O n .
•
•
•
M e s s a g e c e n t r e s — View the available message
centres for your device, or create a new one.
M e s s a g e c e n t r e i n u s e — Select a message centre
to send the message.
To view messages related to a topic, select the topic.
C h a r a c t e r e n c o d i n g — Select R e d u c e d s u p p o r t to
use automatic character conversion to another
encoding system when available.
To receive messages related to a topic, select
O p t i o n s > S u b s c r i b e .
T i p : You can set important topics as hot topics.
While the device is in the standby mode, you are
notified when you receive a message related to
a hot topic. Select a topic, and select O p t i o n s >
H o t m a r k .
•
•
R e c e i v e r e p o r t — Select Y e s if you want the
network to send you delivery reports on your
messages (network service).
M e s s a g e v a l i d i t y — Select how long the message
centre resends your message if the first attempt fails
6 0
(network service). If the recipient cannot be reached
within the validity period, the message is deleted
from the message centre.
•
•
A c c e s s p o i n t i n u s e — Select the default access
point to connect to the multimedia message centre.
You may not be able to change the default access
point if it is preset in your device by your service
provider.
•
M e s s a g e s e n t a s — Convert the message to another
format, such as T e x t , F a x , P a g i n g , or E - m a i l .
Change this option only if you are sure that your
message centre is able toconverttextmessages into
these other formats. Contact your service provider.
P r e f e r r e d c o n n e c t i o n — Select the preferred
method of connection when sending text messages
from your device.
M u l t i m e d i a r e t r i e v a l — Select A l w a y s
a u t o m a t i c to receive multimedia messages always
automatically, A u t o i n h o m e n e t w . to receive
notification of a new multimedia message that you
can retrieve from the message centre (for example,
when you are travelling abroad and are outside your
home network), M a n u a l to retrieve multimedia
messages from the message centre manually, or
O f f to prevent receipt of any multimedia messages.
A l l o w a n o n . m s g s . — Select whether you want to
receive messages from unknown senders.
R e c e i v e a d v e r t s — Select whether you want to
receive messages defined as advertisements.
R e c e i v e r e p o r t — Select Y e s to have the status of
the sent message to be shown in the log (network
service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia
message that has been sent to an e-mail address
may not be possible.
•
•
R e p l y v i a s a m e c e n t r e — Select whether you want
the reply message to be sent using the same text
message centre number (network service).
•
•
•
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e
s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e .
Select from the following:
•
•
I m a g e s i z e — Select S m a l l or L a r g e to scale images
in multimedia messages. Select O r i g i n a l to
maintain the original image size.
•
•
D e n y r e p o r t s e n d i n g — Select Y e s to not send
delivery reports from your device for received
multimedia messages.
M M S c r e a t i o n m o d e — Select R e s t r i c t e d to have
your device prevent you from including content in
multimedia messages that may not be supported by
the network or the receiving device. To receive
warnings about including such content, select
G u i d e d . To create a multimedia message with no
restrictions on attachment type, select F r e e . If you
select R e s t r i c t e d , creating multimedia
M e s s a g e v a l i d i t y — Select how long the messaging
centre tries to send the message (network service).
If the recipient of a message cannot be reached
within the validity period, the message is removed
from the multimedia messaging centre. M a x i m u m
t i m e is the maximum amount of time allowed by
the network.
presentations is not possible.
6 1
a s k if you want to confirm from where the e-mail
should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail.
S e n d m e s s a g e — Select to send the e-mail
immediately or when a connection is available.
S e n d c o p y t o s e l f — Select whether you want to
save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox
and to the address defined in M y e - m a i l a d d r e s s in
the O u t g o i n g e - m a i l settings.
E - m a i l a c c o u n t s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
•
•
E - m a i l .
If you try to edit mailbox settings but have not set up
an e-mail account, the mailbox guide opens and helps
you set up your e-mail account.
If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the
•
•
I n c l u d e s i g n a t u r e — Select whether you want to
attach a signature to your e-mail messages.
N e w e - m a i l a l e r t s — Select whether you want to
be notified of a new received e-mail message with
a tone and a note.
scroll key to edit the settings.
The settings available for editing may vary. Some
settings may be preset by your service provider.
C o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g s
R e t r i e v a l s e t t i n g s
To define the connection settings, select an e-mail
account and O p t i o n s > E d i t > C o n n e c t i o n
s e t t i n g s . To editthesettingsfor the e-mailyoureceive,
select I n c o m i n g e - m a i l . To edit the settings for the e-
mail you send, select O u t g o i n g e - m a i l .
To define the retrieval settings, select the e-mail
account, select O p t i o n s > E d i t > R e t r i e v a l
s e t t i n g s , and define the following settings:
•
E - m a i l t o r e t r i e v e — Select whether you want to
retrieve only the e-mail header information such as
sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail with
attachments. This setting is for POP3 mailboxes
only.
U s e r s e t t i n g s
To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select
the account, select O p t i o n s > E d i t > U s e r s e t t i n g s ,
and define the following settings:
•
•
•
R e t r i e v a l a m o u n t — Select the number of e-mail
messages you want to retrieve from the remote
server to your mailbox.
•
M y n a m e — Enter a name to appear before your e-
mail address when you send e-mail.
I M A P 4 f o l d e r p a t h — Define the folder path for
folders to be subscribed. This setting is for IMAP4
mailboxes only.
•
R e p l y - t o — Select whether you want replies to be
redirected to a different address. Select O n , and
enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct
the replies. You can only enter one address to which
replies are directed.
F o l d e r s u b s c r i p t i o n s — Subscribe to other folders
in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from
those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes
only.
•
D e l e t e e - m a i l s f r o m — Select whether you want to
delete the e-mail messages only from the device or
from both the device and the server. Select A l w a y s
6 2
downloads since not all services can be downloaded
automatically.
A u t o m a t i c r e t r i e v a l s e t t i n g s
To define the automatic retrieval settings for an e-mail
account, select the account, select O p t i o n s > E d i t >
A u t o m a t i c r e t r i e v a l , and define the following
settings:
C e l l b r o a d c a s t s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
•
E - m a i l r e t r i e v a l — Select E n a b l e d to retrieve new
e-mail messages automatically from your remote
mailbox, or O n l y i n h o m e n e t w . to retrieve new e-
mail messages automatically from your remote
mailbox only when you are in your home network
and not, for example, travelling.
C e l l b r o a d c a s t .
To receive cell broadcast messages, select
R e c e p t i o n > O n .
To select the languages in which you want to receive
cell broadcast messages, select L a n g u a g e .
•
•
•
•
R e t r i e v a l d a y s — Select the days on which e-mail
is retrieved to your device.
To display new topics in the cell broadcast topics list,
select T o p i c d e t e c t i o n > O n .
R e t r i e v a l h o u r s — Define the hours between which
the e-mail is retrieved.
R e t r i e v a l i n t e r v a l — Select the interval between
retrieving new e-mail messages.
O t h e r s e t t i n g s
E - m a i l n o t i f i c a t i o n s — Select whether you want to
receive notifications on received e-mail.
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
O t h e r .
Select from the following:
•
S a v e s e n t m e s s a g e s — Select whetherto storesent
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e s e t t i n g s
messages in the Sent folder.
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
•
N u m b e r o f s a v e d m s g s . — Enter the number of
sent messages to save. When the limit is reached,
the oldest message is deleted.
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e .
To receive service messages from service providers,
select S e r v i c e m e s s a g e s > O n .
•
•
M e m o r y i n u s e — Select where to save your
messages. You can save messages to the memory
card only if a memory card is inserted.
F o l d e r v i e w — Define how you want the messages
in Inbox to be shown.
To select how to download services and service
message content, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
S e r v i c e m e s s a g e > D o w n l o a d m e s s a g e s >
A u t o m a t i c a l l y or M a n u a l l y . If you select
A u t o m a t i c a l l y , you may still need to confirm some
6 3
N o k i a O f f i c e T o o l s
Nokia Office Tools support mobile business and enable To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or
effective communication with work teams.
change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and
use the scroll key to select the text. Then select
O p t i o n s > T e x t .
To send the note using a text message, multimedia
message, e-mail, Bluetooth, or infrared, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d .
To link a note to a contact, select O p t i o n s > L i n k n o t e
t o c a l l > A d d c o n t a c t s . You can see the note on the
display of your device when making a call to or
receiving a call from the contact.
A c t i v e n o t e s
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > A c t i v e n o t e s .
Active notes allows you to create, edit, and view
different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos,
hobby notes, or shopping lists. You can insert images,
videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to
other applications, such as Contacts, and send notes to
others.
S e t t i n g s f o r A c t i v e n o t e s
Select S e t t i n g s .
C r e a t e a n d e d i t n o t e s
To create a note, start writing.
To save notes to your device memory, select M e m o r y
i n u s e > P h o n e m e m o r y . To save them to a memory
card, select M e m o r y i n u s e > M e m o r y c a r d .
To change the layout of active notes, select C h a n g e
v i e w > G r i d . To view the notes as a list, select C h a n g e
v i e w > L i s t .
To see a note in the background when making or
receiving phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g c a l l >
Y e s .
To edit a note, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.
To insert images, sound clips, video, business cards,
web bookmarks, and files, select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t
o b j e c t .
To add new items to the note, select O p t i o n s > I n s e r t
n e w . You can record sound and video clips, and capture
images.
6 4
T i p : If you temporarily do not want to see the
notes during phone calls, select S h o w n o t e
d u r i n g c a l l > N o . This way you do not have to
remove the links between notes and contact
cards.
S e a r c h r e s u l t s
To open the content, select the desired search result.
You may then use the content, for example, to answer
e-mail messages or edit documents.
To conduct a new search, select O p t i o n s > N e w
s e a r c h .
S e a r c h
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > I n - d e v i c e s e a r c h .
C a l c u l a t o r
With Search, you can search for information in your
contacts, notes, calendar appointments, to-do notes,
e-mail messages, multimedia messages, and text
messages. You can also search for files by the file names
in your device memory and memory card.
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > C a l c u l a t o r .
This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for
simple calculations.
To make a calculation, enter the first number of the
calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract
from the function map. Enter the second number of the
calculation, and select = . The calculator performs
operations in the order they are entered. The result of
the calculation remains in the editor field and can be
used as the first number of a new calculation.
S e a r c h f o r i n f o r m a t i o n
1. Select the content types you want to search in. To
remove the selection, select it again. To include all
content types in your search, select S e l e c t a l l .
2. Enter your search keywords or some part of the
The device saves the result of the last calculation in its
keywords.
memory. Exiting the Calculator application or
switching off the device does not clear the memory. To
recall the last saved result the next time you open the
Calculator application, select O p t i o n s > L a s t r e s u l t .
3. Select S e a r c h .
T i p : Wildcards may help you find items. In your
search keyword, use ? to substitute a single
character, and * to substitute zero or more
characters. If you use a wildcard, add * to the
beginning and end of the search keyword.
To save the numbers or results of a calculation, select
O p t i o n s > M e m o r y > S a v e .
To retrieve the results of acalculationfromthe memory
and use them in a calculation, select O p t i o n s >
M e m o r y > R e c a l l .
To view the search results from your previous search,
select O p t i o n s > P r e v i o u s r e s u l t s .
6 5
2003 documents (*.doc, *.xls, and *.ppt) with
Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of
Quickoffice, you can also edit files.
F i l e m a n a g e r
With File manager, you can manage the contents and
properties of files and folders on your device memory
and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy,
rename, send, and search for files and folders.
All file formats or features are not supported.
W o r k w i t h f i l e s
Copyright protection may prevent sending some files.
To open a file, scroll to the corresponding tab, select
Open the device tab or the memory card tab.
the file, and press the scroll key.
To select multiple files, scroll to each file, and select
To create a new file, select O p t i o n s > N e w f i l e >
O p t i o n s > M a r k / U n m a r k > M a r k .
Q u i c k w o r d or Q u i c k s h e e t .
To send the selected files, select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
To sort files according to the type, select O p t i o n s >
To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select
O p t i o n s > M o v e t o f o l d e r or C o p y t o f o l d e r . Default
folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved.
S o r t b y .
To view the details of a file, select O p t i o n s >
D e t a i l s . The details include the name, size and location
of the file, and the time and date when the file was last
modified.
To search for files, select O p t i o n s > F i n d . Enter the
search text, and press the scroll key. The folders and
files whose names contain the search text are
displayed.
To view information about the selected file, select
O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s . To view additional information
about the file online, select O p t i o n s > A d d i t i o n a l
d e t a i l s .
To send files to a compatible device, select O p t i o n s >
S e n d and the sending method.
N o k i a T e a m s u i t e
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > T e a m s .
With Nokia Team Suite, you can create, edit, and delete
teams, and send messages, view teams' web pages and
communication history, and make phone calls to
teams.
Q u i c k o f f i c e
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > Q u i c k o f f i c e .
Quickoffice consists of Quickword for Microsoft Word,
Quicksheet for Microsoft Excel, Quickpoint for Microsoft
PowerPoint, and Quickmanager for purchasing
6 6
software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and
•
•
P u s h t o t a l k — Communicate through push to talk
(network service) with the team or selected team
members.
W o r k w i t h t e a m s
To create a new team, select O p t i o n s > T e a m >
C r e a t e n e w . Give a name for the team and enter the
conference call service information, if needed. Then
select the members for the team.
T e a m W e b b o o k m a r k s — Open the bookmark
folder that contains the team web pages.
To select an action, first select the team to which you
want to apply the action, then scroll to the action bar,
and select the desired action. If you do not want to
apply the action to all team members, open the team,
and select the desired members. Then select the action.
E d i t t e a m s
To add team members, select O p t i o n s > M e m b e r s >
A d d .
To remove team members, select O p t i o n s >
To find more actions than are shown on the action bar,
M e m b e r s > R e m o v e .
select O p t i o n s > A c t i o n s .
To edit the details of a member, select O p t i o n s >
The following actions are available:
M e m b e r s > E d i t .
•
C a l l — Make a phone call to the team or selected
team members. The team members are called one
by one and put on hold until the calls can be merged
into a conference call (network service). The
maximum number of participants depends on the
network service.
To see to which teams a member belongs, select
O p t i o n s > M e m b e r s > B e l o n g s t o t e a m s .
N o k i a T e a m S u i t e s e t t i n g s
To select whether to see the team members' pictures
on the display, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > V i e w
c o n t a c t i m a g e .
To define the plug-in settings, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > P l u g - i n s e t t i n g s . This setting is available
only if there are plug-ins to configure.
•
•
C r e a t e m e s s a g e — Send a text message, a
multimedia message, or an e-mail to the team or
selected team members.
C a l l c o n f e r e n c e s e r v i c e — Start a call to the
conference call service (network service) defined for
the selected team.
•
•
•
C o m m u n i c a t i o n l o g — View the communication
log for the team or selected team members.
A c t i v e n o t e s — Write and read notes related to the
team.
A c t i o n b a r s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > A c t i o n b a r i c o n s .
T e a m s e a r c h — Search for content related to the
team or selected team members.
To show action buttons in the action bar, select the
6 7
desired actions. To hide actions, remove the selection.
To change the order of the action buttons, select an
action, and O p t i o n s > M o v e u p , M o v e d o w n , M o v e
t o t o p , or M o v e t o b o t t o m .
S e t b a s e c u r r e n c y a n d
e x c h a n g e r a t e
T i p : If you select not to show all actions in the
action bar, you can still access the actions by
selecting O p t i o n s > A c t i o n s .
N o t e : When you change base currency, you must
enter new exchange rates because all previously set
exchange rates are cleared.
Before you can make currency conversions, you must
choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The
rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency
determines the conversion rates of the other
currencies.
C o n v e r t e r
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > C o n v e r t e r .
The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding
errors may occur.
1. To set the rate of exchange for the unit of currency,
scroll to the T y p e field, and select O p t i o n s >
C u r r e n c y r a t e s .
C o n v e r t m e a s u r e m e n t s
2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the exchange
rate you would like to set per single unit of
currency.
1. Scroll to the T y p e field, and select O p t i o n s >
C o n v e r s i o n t y p e to open a list of measures. Select
the measure to use, and select O K .
3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency,
2. Scroll to the first U n i t field, and select O p t i o n s >
S e l e c t u n i t . Select the unit from which to convert,
and select O K . Scroll to the next U n i t field, and
select the unit to which to convert.
and select O p t i o n s > S e t a s b a s e c u r r e n c y .
4. Select D o n e > Y e s to save the changes.
After you have inserted all the necessary exchange
rates, you can make currency conversions.
3. Scroll to the first A m o u n t field, and enter the value
to convert. The other A m o u n t field changes
automatically to show the converted value.
Z i p m a n a g e r
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > Z i p .
With Zip manager, you can create new archive files to
store compressed ZIP formatted files; add single or
multiple compressed files or directories to an archive;
set, clear, or change the archive password for protected
6 8
archives; and change settings, such as compression
level, and file name encoding.
To print to a file, select O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g
o p t i o n s > P r i n t t o f i l e , and determine the location
for the file.
To change the printing options, select O p t i o n s >
P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s . You can select the printer you want
to use, the number of copies and the range of pages
you want to print.
You can store the archive files on the device memory
or on a memory card.
P D F r e a d e r
To change the page layout before printing, select
O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s > P a g e s e t u p . You can
change the paper size and orientation, define the
margins, and insert a header or a footer. The maximum
length of the header and footer is 128 characters.
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > A d o b e R e a d e r .
With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the
display of your device; search for text in the
documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and
page views; and send PDF files using e-mail.
To preview a file or message before you print, select
O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s > P r e v i e w .
P r i n t i n g
P r i n t i n g o p t i o n s
Youcan print a message or file from the device, preview
a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, Open a file or message, and select O p t i o n s > P r i n t i n g
or print to a file. You may not be able to print all
messages, such as multimedia messages or other
special messages.
o p t i o n s .
Define the following options:
•
•
P r i n t e r — Select an available printer from the list.
P r i n t — Select A l l p a g e s , E v e n p a g e s , or O d d
p a g e s as the print range.
P r i n t f i l e s
•
•
•
P r i n t r a n g e — Select A l l p a g e s i n r a n g e , C u r r e n t
p a g e , or D e f i n e d p a g e s as the page range.
N u m b e r o f c o p i e s — Select the number of copies
to print.
To configure a printer for your device, select M e n u >
O f f i c e > P r i n t e r s > O p t i o n s > A d d . To set the
printer as the default printer, select O p t i o n s > S e t a s
d e f a u l t .
P r i n t t o f i l e — Select to print to a file and determine
the location for the file.
Before you print, make sure your device is properly
connected to the printer.
To print a message or a file, select O p t i o n s > P r i n t .
6 9
switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone.
If you select S t o p , the device asks whether you want
to activate the device for calls. Select N o to switch off
the device or Y e s to make and receive calls. Do not
select Y e s when wireless phone use may cause
interference or danger.
P r i n t e r s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > P r i n t e r s .
To add a new printer, select O p t i o n s > A d d .
Define the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P r i n t e r — Enter a name for the printer.
D r i v e r — Select a driver for the printer.
B e a r e r — Select a bearer for the printer.
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point.
P o r t — Select the port.
To change the alarm time, select O p t i o n s > R e s e t
a l a r m .
To remove the alarm, select O p t i o n s > R e m o v e
a l a r m .
H o s t — Define the host.
U s e r — Enter the user.
W o r l d c l o c k
Q u e u e — Enter the print queue.
O r i e n t a t i o n — Select the orientation.
P a p e r s i z e — Select the paper size.
Open the world clock tab to check the time in different
cities.
To add a city to the world clock view, select O p t i o n s >
A d d c i t y .
C l o c k
To change the city that determines the time and date
in your device, select O p t i o n s > S e t a s c u r r e n t c i t y .
The city is displayed in the Clock main view, and the
time in your device is changed according to the city
selected. Check that the time is correct and matches
your time zone.
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > C l o c k .
In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone
information, set and edit alarms, or modify date and
time settings.
A l a r m c l o c k
C l o c k s e t t i n g s
Open the alarm clock tab.
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
To set an alarm, select O p t i o n s > S e t a l a r m . When an
To change the time or date, select T i m e or D a t e .
alarm is active,
is displayed.
To change the clock shown in the standby modes,
To switch off the alarm, select S t o p , or to stop the
alarm for 5 minutes, select S n o o z e . If the alarm time
is reached while the device is switched off, the device
select C l o c k t y p e > A n a l o g u e or D i g i t a l .
7 0
To allow the mobile phone network to update the time,
date, and time zone information to your device
(network service), select N e t w o r k o p e r a t o r t i m e >
A u t o - u p d a t e .
To change the alarm tone, select C l o c k a l a r m t o n e .
N o t e s
Select M e n u > O f f i c e > N o t e s .
You can create and send notes to other compatible
devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format)
to Notes.
W r i t e a n d s e n d n o t e s
To write a note, start entering the text. The note editor
opens automatically.
To open a note, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.
To send a note to other compatible devices, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d .
To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings
for a note, select O p t i o n s > S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n . Select
S t a r t to initialise synchronisation or S e t t i n g s to define
the synchronisation settings for the note.
7 1
F r e e t i m e
Your device contains a variety of media applications for To adjust the image, select O p t i o n s > A d j u s t >
both business and leisure time usage.
W h i t e b a l a n c e or C o l o u r t o n e .
To capture images in a sequence, select O p t i o n s >
S e q u e n c e m o d e . The camera captures six images in a
row.
C a m e r a
To capture timed images, select O p t i o n s > S e l f -
t i m e r , select the desired time-out, and press
A c t i v a t e . The camera captures an imageafter the time-
out has passed.
Select M e n u > M e d i a > C a m e r a .
C a p t u r e a n i m a g e
Your device supports an image capture resolution of up
to 1600x1200 pixels. The image resolution in this guide
may appear different.
T i p : To access thevarious camera modes quickly,
select O p t i o n s > S h o w t o o l b a r .
To view the captured images, select M e n u > M e d i a >
To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder,
aim at your subject, and press the scroll key. The device
saves the image in the default folder, or in the folder
you have defined.
G a l l e r y > I m a g e s .
R e c o r d a v i d e o c l i p
T i p : To zoom in or out before taking a picture,
1. Scroll to the video tab to activate the video
scroll up or down.
recorder.
2. To start recording a video clip, press the scroll key.
The remaining recording time is shown on the top
of the display.
If you do not want to keep the captured image, select
O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . Select B a c k to return to the
viewfinder to capture another image. Select O p t i o n s >
G o t o G a l l e r y to view the image in Gallery.
3. To pause the recording, select P a u s e ; to resume the
recording, select C o n t i n u e .
If the light is dim, select O p t i o n s > N i g h t m o d e
7 2
before capturing an image.
4. To stop the recording, select S t o p . The device saves
the clip in the default folder, or in the folder you
have defined.
W o r k w i t h m e d i a f i l e s a n d
f o l d e r s
5. If you do not want to keep the saved video clip,
select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . Select B a c k to return to
the viewfinder to record another video clip. Select
O p t i o n s > P l a y to view the video clip in the
RealPlayer application.
To open a file or a folder, scroll to it, and press the scroll
key.
To create a new folder, select a file and then select
O p t i o n s > O r g a n i s e > N e w f o l d e r . You cannot
create folders within folders.
To copy or move files, select a file and O p t i o n s >
O r g a n i s e > M o v e t o f o l d e r , N e w f o l d e r , M o v e t o
m e m o r y c a r d , C o p y t o m e m o r y c a r d , C o p y t o p h o n e
m e m . , or M o v e t o p h o n e m e m . .
To download files into Gallery using the browser, select
D o w n l . g r a p h i c s , D o w n l d . v i d e o s , D o w n l d . t r a c k s ,
or D o w n l d . s o u n d s . The browser opens, and you can
choose a bookmark or enter the address for the
download site.
C a m e r a s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
To adjust image quality, to select whether images
remain on the display after capturing them, and to
change resolution, default name, or memory in which
to save your new images, select I m a g e .
To change the length, resolution, and default name of
the videos you record or the memory in which to save
them, select V i d e o .
To search for a file, select O p t i o n s > F i n d . Write the
item you are searching for. Files that match the search
are shown.
G a l l e r y
V i e w i m a g e s
Select M e n u > M e d i a > G a l l e r y .
To open an image for viewing, select O p t i o n s >
Use Gallery to access and use different types of media,
including images, videos, music, and sounds. All
viewed images and videos, and all received music and
sounds are automatically saved to Gallery. Sound clips
are opened in the Music player, and video clips and
streaming links in the RealPlayer application. Images
are opened in the image viewer.
O p e n .
To open the next or previous image for viewing, scroll
right or left.
To enlarge the image on the display, select O p t i o n s >
Z o o m i n . To reduce the image on the display, select
Z o o m o u t .
7 3
To view the image in full screen size, select O p t i o n s > does not necessarily support all variations of a media
F u l l s c r e e n . To return to normalview, selectO p t i o n s > file format.
N o r m a l s c r e e n .
To rotate the image, select O p t i o n s > R o t a t e . Select
P l a y v i d e o c l i p s a n d s t r e a m
R i g h t to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or
select L e f t to rotate the image counterclockwise by 90
l i n k s
degrees.
W a r n i n g : Do not hold the device near your ear
when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume
M a n a g e i m a g e f i l e s
may be extremely loud.
To view detailed information about the image, select
To play a video clip or audio file, select O p t i o n s >
O p e n > M o s t r e c e n t c l i p s to play one of the six clips
you most recently played, or S a v e d c l i p to play a clip
or open a web link. Select P l a y .
O p t i o n s > V i e w d e t a i l s .
To send the image, select O p t i o n s > S e n d , and the
method for sending.
To rename the image, select O p t i o n s > R e n a m e .
To play streaming media, select a web link that points
to a clip, and select P l a y ; or connect to the web, browse
to a video clip or audio file, and select P l a y . RealPlayer
recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an
http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content
begins streaming, your device must connect to a web
site and buffer the content. If a network connection
problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts
automatically to reconnect to the internet access point.
To set the image as the display background, select
O p t i o n s > U s e i m a g e > S e t a s w a l l p a p e r .
To add the image to a contact, select O p t i o n s > A d d
t o c o n t a c t . The Contacts application opens, and you
can select the contact for the image.
R e a l P l a y e r
To adjust the volume during playback, use the volume
keys.
Select M e n u > M e d i a > R e a l P l a y e r .
To fast-forward during playback, scroll up and hold. To
rewind during play, scroll down and hold.
To stop the playback or streaming, select S t o p .
Buffering or connecting to the streaming site stops, the
playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the
beginning.
RealPlayer plays video clips and audio files that are
stored in the device memory or on a memory card,
transferred to your device from an e-mail message or
a compatible computer, or streamed to your device
over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4
(not streaming), 3GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. RealPlayer
7 4
To download video clips from the web, select
R e a l P l a y e r s e t t i n g s
O p t i o n s > D o w n l o a d v i d e o s .
You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from
To view the video clip in full-screen size, select
O p t i o n s > P l a y i n f u l l s c r e e n . Full screen increases
the size of the video to cover the maximum video area
possible while the aspect ratio is maintained.
your service provider.
To define the settings manually, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > V i d e o or S t r e a m i n g .
T i p : To switch between the normal screen and
full screen quickly, press 2 on the keypad.
M u s i c p l a y e r
Select M e n u > M e d i a > M u s i c p l a y e r .
S e n d a u d i o f i l e s a n d v i d e o
c l i p s
With Music player, you can play music files, and create
and listen to track lists. Music player supports files with
extensions such as MP3 and AAC.
To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d . Select the sending method.
To send a media clip inside a message, create a
multimedia message, select a clip to attach and I n s e r t
o b j e c t > V i d e o c l i p or S o u n d c l i p .
L i s t e n t o m u s i c
W a r n i n g : Listen to music at a moderate level.
Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your
hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the
loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be
extremely loud.
V i e w i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t a
m e d i a c l i p
To view the properties of a video clip, audio file, or web
link, select O p t i o n s > C l i p d e t a i l s . Information may
include for example the bit rate or the internet link of
a streaming file.
To set on file protection for a media clip, select
O p t i o n s > C l i p d e t a i l s > S t a t u s > O p t i o n s >
C h a n g e . File protection prevents others from changing
a file.
To select a music track, select O p t i o n s > M u s i c
l i b r a r y . A l l t r a c k s lists all music onyour device. To view
sorted songs, select A l b u m s , A r t i s t s , G e n r e s , or
C o m p o s e r s .
To play the track, select O p t i o n s > P l a y . To pause the
playing, scroll to and press the scroll key.
To fast-forward or rewind the track, scroll up or down
and hold.
7 5
To select the previous or next track, scroll up or down.
To control the music volume, scroll right or left. To
To play all music tracks from a subcategory, scroll to a
mute the volume, scroll left until the volume is muted. subcategory, and select O p t i o n s > P l a y .
To view all tracks that belong to a subcategory, scroll
to the subcategory, and press the scroll key.
To stop a track, scroll to
and press the scroll key.
To play the music tracks repeatedly, select O p t i o n s >
L o o p . Select A l l to repeat all the tracks in the current
folder, O n e to repeat the selected track, or O f f to set
off the repeating.
To add all music tracks from a specific subcategory to
a new, saved, or the currently playing track list, select
O p t i o n s > A d d t o t r a c k l i s t .
To delete all tracks from a category or subcategory,
To play music in random order, select a folder and
select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e .
O p t i o n s > R a n d o m p l a y .
After you have added or removed music files in the
device, update your music library. Select O p t i o n s >
U p d a t e M u s i c l i b r a r y . Music player searches the
device memory for music files and updates them to the
music library.
P r e s e t f r e q u e n c y s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > E q u a l i s e r .
To use a preset frequency setting when playing music,
select the frequency setting you want to use, and select
O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e .
To view music track information, select O p t i o n s >
V i e w d e t a i l s .
To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select
O p t i o n s > E d i t , select a frequency band, and scroll up
or down to increase or decrease its value. You hear your
frequency adjustment immediately in the playback.
T r a c k l i s t s
You can create a new track list and add tracks to it, or
edit a saved track list.
To reset the frequency bands to their original values,
select O p t i o n s > R e s e t t o d e f a u l t s .
To create a new track list, select O p t i o n s > M u s i c
l i b r a r y > T r a c k l i s t s > O p t i o n s > N e w t r a c k l i s t .
To create your own frequency setting, select O p t i o n s >
N e w p r e s e t . Enter a name for the frequency setting.
Scroll up or down to move between the frequency
bands and set the frequency on each band.
To add a track to a track list, open the track list, and
select O p t i o n s > A d d t r a c k s .
M u s i c c a t e g o r i e s
R e c o r d e r
To view music categories, select M u s i c l i b r a r y >
7 6
A r t i s t s , A l b u m s , G e n r e s , or C o m p o s e r s .
Select M e n u > M e d i a > R e c o r d e r .
With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a
voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip,
and play the sound clip. Recorder supports the AMR file
format.
To change the default location of saved recordings,
select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > M e m o r y i n u s e .
To define the recording quality, select O p t i o n s >
R e c o r d i n g q u a l i t y .
You can also press the voice key to open the Recorder
application. If you have logged in to push to talk, the
voice key works as a push-to-talk key and does not
open Recorder.
T i p : Waveform files (.wav) are a more common
audio file format, but adaptive multirate files
(.amr) are smaller for comparable sound quality.
R e c o r d a s o u n d c l i p
I n s t a n t m e s s a g i n g
To record a sound clip, select O p t i o n s > R e c o r d
s o u n d c l i p . Select P a u s e to pause the recording, and
R e c o r d to resume recording. When you finish
recording, select S t o p . The sound clip is automatically
saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery.
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I M .
Instant messaging (IM) (network service) allows you to
converse with other people using instant messages
and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific
topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers
that you can log in to after you register to an IM service.
Service providers may differ in their support of
features.
P l a y a r e c o r d i n g
To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select
P l a y . The progress bar displays the playing time,
position, and length of the clip. Select S t o p to cancel
the playback.
If IM is not available from your service provider, it may
not appear in the menu of your device. Contact your
service provider for more information about signing up
for IM services and costs of services. For more
information on IM settings, contact your service
provider.
To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select
P a u s e . Playback resumes when you select P l a y .
You may receive the settings in a special text message
from the service provider that offers the IM service. If
not, enter the settings manually.
R e c o r d e r s e t t i n g s
Recordings are automatically saved to the device
memory unless you change the default location.
Recordings that you create or receive after you change
the settings are affected.
7 7
You can search by U s e r ' s n a m e , U s e r I D , P h o n e
D e f i n e I M s e t t i n g s
To define the IM application settings, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > I M s e t t i n g s . You can, for example, set your
screen name and IM alert tones.
n u m b e r , and E - m a i l a d d r e s s .
To view a conversation, select a participant.
To continue the conversation, enter your message, and
select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and
edit your IM contacts, you must log into an instant
messaging server. To add an IM server, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e r v e r s e t t i n g s > S e r v e r s .
Ask your service provider for the correct settings. To set
the server as the one to which your device
To return to the conversations list without closing the
conversation, select B a c k . To close the conversation,
select O p t i o n s > E n d c o n v e r s a t i o n .
To start a new conversation, select O p t i o n s > N e w
c o n v e r s a t i o n . You can start a new conversation with
a contact while you are inside an active conversation.
However, you cannot have two active conversations
with the same contact.
automatically logs in, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
S e r v e r s e t t i n g s > D e f a u l t s e r v e r .
To define how your device connects to the IM server,
select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > S e r v e r s e t t i n g s > I M
l o g i n t y p e . To establish a connection between your
device and the default server automatically, select
A u t o m a t i c . To automate the connection only when in
your home network, select A u t o i n h o m e n e t w . To
connect to the server when you open the IM
To insert an image to an instant message, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d i m a g e , and select the image you
want to send.
To save a conversation participant to your IM contacts,
select O p t i o n s > A d d t o I M c o n t a c t s .
application, select O n a p p . s t a r t - u p . To connect to the
server manually, select M a n u a l and log into the server
in the IM main view by selecting O p t i o n s > L o g i n .
Enter your user ID and password at the prompt. You can
obtain the user name, password, and other settings to
log in from your service provider when you register for
the service.
To save a conversation, while in the conversation view,
select O p t i o n s > R e c o r d c h a t . The conversation is
saved as a text file that can be opened and viewed in
the Notes application.
I M g r o u p s
Open I M g r o u p s . I M g r o u p s is available only if you are
logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM
groups.
S t a r t a c o n v e r s a t i o n
Open C o n v e r s a t i o n s .
To create an IM group, select O p t i o n s > C r e a t e n e w
To search for IM users and user IDs, select I M
g r o u p .
7 8
c o n t a c t s > O p t i o n s > N e w I M c o n t a c t > S e a r c h .
To join an IM group or to continue a group
B l o c k u s e r s
conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll
Select I M c o n t a c t s > O p t i o n s > B l o c k i n g o p t i o n s >
key. Enter a message, and select O p t i o n s > S e n d .
V i e w b l o c k e d l i s t .
To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for which
you know the group ID, select O p t i o n s > J o i n n e w
g r o u p .
To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the
user's name. Matching names appear in a list.
To allow receiving messages from a blocked IM user,
To leave the IM group, select O p t i o n s > L e a v e I M
select O p t i o n s > U n b l o c k .
g r o u p .
To prevent receiving messages from other IM users,
select O p t i o n s > B l o c k n e w c o n t a c t s . Select the IM
user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID.
To search for IM groups and group IDs, select I M
g r o u p s > O p t i o n s > S e a r c h . You can search by
G r o u p n a m e , T o p i c , and M e m b e r s (user ID).
To add an IM user to the group, select O p t i o n s > A d d
m e m b e r . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter
the contact ID.
I M a p p l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g s
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > I M s e t t i n g s and define
To remove a member from the IM group, select
the following settings:
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .
•
•
U s e s c r e e n n a m e — To change the name that
To provide members with editing rights to the group,
select O p t i o n s > A d d e d i t o r . Select a user from your
IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with
editing rights can edit group settings and invite other
users to join the group or ban them from the group.
identifies you in IM groups, select Y e s .
S h o w m y a v a i l a b i l i t y — Select whether you allow
all other IM users or only your IM contacts to see
when you are online. Select T o n o - o n e to hide your
online status.
To remove editing rights from a group member, select
•
•
•
•
A l l o w m e s s a g e s f r o m — Select to receive instant
messages from all other IM users, your IM contacts
only, or not to receive messages at all.
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .
To prevent IM users from joining the group, select
O p t i o n s > A d d t o b a n n e d l i s t . Select a user from your
IM contacts or enter the ID of the user.
A l l o w i n v i t a t i o n s f r o m — Select to receive
invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM
contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all.
M s g . s c r o l l i n g s p e e d — To decrease or increase the
speed at which new messages are displayed, scroll
left or right.
To allow a banned user to join the group, select
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e .
7 9
S o r t I M c o n t a c t s — Select to list your IM contacts
alphabetically or by their online status.
•
A v a i l a b i l i t y r e l o a d i n g — To update the online
status of your IM contacts automatically, select
A u t o m a t i c .
H i g h , the playback of some flash files may appear
uneven and slow due to their original settings. Change
the quality setting of such files to N o r m a l or L o w for
improved playback.
•
•
•
•
O f f l i n e c o n t a c t s — Select if IM contacts with an
offline status are shown in the IM contacts list.
O w n m e s s a g e c o l o u r — Select the colour of the
instant messages you send.
To organise your flash files, select O p t i o n s >
O r g a n i s e .
R e c e i v e d m s g c o l o u r — Select the colour of the
instant messages you receive.
V i s u a l r a d i o
S h o w d a t e / t i m e i n f o — Select Y e s to view the
receiving or sending time of each message in an IM
conversation.
Select M e n u > M e d i a > R a d i o .
The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the
•
I M a l e r t t o n e — Select the tone that is played when
you receive a new instant message.
coverage of the radio station in that particular area.
The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the
wireless device antenna. Attach a compatible headset
or enhancement to the device for the FM radio to
function properly.
F l a s h p l a y e r
Select M e n u > M e d i a > F l a s h P l a y e r .
With Flash player, you can view, play, and interact with
flash files made for mobile devices.
L i s t e n t o t h e r a d i o
W a r n i n g : Listen to music at a moderate level.
Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your
hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the
loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be
extremely loud.
M a n a g e f l a s h f i l e s
To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key.
To send a flash file to compatible devices, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d . Copyright protection may prevent
the sending of some flash files.
To search for a station, select
or
. To set the
frequency manually, select O p t i o n s > M a n u a l
To switch between flash files saved on your device
memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding
tabs.
t u n i n g .
To view available stations based on location, select
O p t i o n s > S t a t i o n d i r e c t o r y (network service).
8 0
To change the flash file quality, select O p t i o n s >
Q u a l i t y when you are playing the flash file. If you select
To save the current station to your station list, select
S a v e d s t a t i o n s
O p t i o n s > S a v e s t a t i o n .
To open the list of your saved stations, select
To select a previously saved radio station, select
or
O p t i o n s > S t a t i o n s .
.
To listen to a saved station, select O p t i o n s >
To adjust the volume, use the volume keys.
To switch from headset use to listening to the radio
through the loudspeaker, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e
l o u d s p e a k e r .
To return to the standby mode and leave the FM radio
playing in the background, select O p t i o n s > P l a y i n
b a c k g r o u n d .
S t a t i o n > L i s t e n .
To view available visual content for a station with the
Visual Radioservice, selectO p t i o n s > S t a t i o n > S t a r t
v i s u a l s e r v i c e .
To change the station details, select O p t i o n s >
S t a t i o n > E d i t .
V i s u a l R a d i o s e t t i n g s
V i e w v i s u a l c o n t e n t
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s and from the following:
To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the
•
S t a r t - u p t o n e — Select whether a tone is played
service, contact your service provider.
when the application is started.
Before you can view visual content, you must have an
internet access point defined at M e n u > T o o l s >
S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > A c c e s s p o i n t s .
•
A u t o - s t a r t s e r v i c e — Select Y e s to have the Visual
Radio service start automatically when you select a
saved station that offers the Visual Radio service.
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point used for the
data connection. You do not need an access point to
use the application as an ordinary FM radio.
C u r r e n t r e g i o n — Select the region you are
currently located in. This setting is displayed only if
there was no network coverage when the
application was started.
•
•
1. To view available visual content for a tuned station,
select O p t i o n s > S t a r t v i s u a l s e r v i c e . If the visual
radio service ID has not been saved for the station,
enter it, or select R e t r i e v e to search for it in the
station directory (network service).
2. Select the location nearest to you from the station
directory. If your device finds a station that matches
the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is
displayed. To view the visual content, select O K .
P u s h t o t a l k
8 1
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > P T T .
Push to talk (PTT) (network service) provides direct
voice communication connected with the push of a key. S w i t c h P T T o n .
With PTT, you can use your device as a walkie-talkie.
To log in to the PTT service manually, select O p t i o n s >
When the R i n g i n g t y p e setting of your device is set to
You can use PTT to have aconversationwithone person B e e p o n c e or S i l e n t , or there is an ongoing phone call,
or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel you cannot make or receive PTT calls.
is like a chat room: you can call the channel to see if
anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the
other users; the users just join the channel and start
M a k e a P T T c a l l
speaking with each other.
W a r n i n g : Do not hold the device near your ear
when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume
may be extremely loud.
In PTT communication, one person talks while the
other users listen through the built-in loudspeaker.
Users take turns responding to each other. Because
only one user can talk at a time, the maximum duration
of a speech turn is limited. For details of the speech turn
duration for your network, contact your service
provider.
To make a PTT call, select O p t i o n s > P T T c o n t a c t s ,
select one or several contacts from the list, and press
the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of
you during the call so you can see the display. The
display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak
towards the microphone, and do not cover the
P T T s e t t i n g s
loudspeaker with your hands. Press and hold the voice
Select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s and select U s e r s e t t i n g s to key the entire time you are talking. When you have
define your preferences for PTT, or C o n n e c t i o n
s e t t i n g s to change the connection details. Contact
your service provider for the correct settings.
finished talking, release the key.
To end the PTT call, press the end key.
When you receive a PTT call, press the call key to answer
T i p : You may also receive the settings in a
the call or the end key to dismiss the call.
message from the provider of the PTT service.
C r e a t e d P T T c a l l s
L o g i n t o P T T s e r v i c e
If you have set A p p l i c a t i o n s t a r t - u p on in U s e r
s e t t i n g s , PTT automatically logs in to the service when
started. If not, you must log in manually.
Select O p t i o n s > P T T l o g > C r e a t e d c a l l s , and a call.
To make a PTT call to a contact, select O p t i o n s > T a l k
1 t o 1 .
8 2
To send a request to a contact to call you, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d c a l l b a c k r e q u e s t .
To create a contact, select O p t i o n s > A d d t o
To view the currently active users of a channel, select
C o n t a c t s .
O p t i o n s > A c t i v e m e m b e r s .
To view more information about a selected user, select
O p t i o n s > C o n t a c t d e t a i l s .
M a n a g e P T T c o n t a c t s
When you log in to PTT, you are automatically
connected to the channels that were active when the
application was last closed.
To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select
O p t i o n s > P T T c o n t a c t s . A list of names from the
Contacts application is displayed with information
about their login status.
E x i t P T T
To exit PTT, select O p t i o n s > E x i t . Select Y e s to log
out and close the service. Select N o if you want to keep
the application active in the background.
To call a selected contact, select O p t i o n s > T a l k 1 t o
1 .
To make a group call, select several contacts and
O p t i o n s > M a k e P T T g r o u p c a l l .
To send the contact a request to call you, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d c a l l b a c k r e q u e s t .
A b o u t G P S a n d
s a t e l l i t e s i g n a l s
To answer a callback request, select S h o w to open the
callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press
the voice key.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide
radio navigation system that includes 24 satellites and
their ground stations that monitor the operation of the
satellites. To use GPS, you need a compatible GPS
receiver. Use Bluetooth connectivity to connect to the
GPS receiver. To start using a compatible GPS receiver
with Bluetooth connectivity, select C o n n e c t i v i t y >
B l u e t o o t h .
C r e a t e a P T T c h a n n e l
To create a channel, select O p t i o n s > N e w
c h a n n e l > C r e a t e n e w .
To register the channel to the PTT service, select
O p t i o n s > R e g i s t e r .
To join a channel, select the channel you want to talk
A GPS terminal receives low-power radio signals from
the satellites and measures the travel time of the
signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can
calculate its location to the accuracy of metres.
to, and press the voice key.
To invite a user to a channel, select O p t i o n s > S e n d
i n v i t a t i o n .
8 3
The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees
and decimal degrees format using the international
WGS-84 coordinate system.
•
Establishing a GPS connection may take from a
couple of seconds to several minutes.
S a t e l l i t e s t a t u s
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the
government of the United States, which is solely
responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The
accuracy of location data can be affected by
To check how many satellites your device has found,
and whether your device is receiving satellite signals,
select M e n u > T o o l s > G P S d a t a > P o s i t i o n >
O p t i o n s > S a t e l l i t e s t a t u s . If your device has found
satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the
satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the
satellite signal. When your device has received enough
data from the satellite signal to calculate the
adjustments to GPSsatellitesmadeby the United States
government and is subject to change with the United
States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the
Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be
affected by poor satellite geometry. Availability and
quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location,
buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions.
The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow
reception of GPS signals.
coordinates of your location, the bar turns black.
Initially your device must receive signals from at least
four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of
your location. When the initial calculation has been
made, it may be possible to continue calculating the
coordinates of your location with three satellites.
However, the accuracy is generally better when more
satellites are found.
Any GPS should not be used for precise location
measurement, and you should never rely solely on
location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio
networks for positioning or navigation.
To enable or disable different positioning methods,
such as Bluetooth GPS, select M e n u > T o o l s >
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > P o s i t i o n i n g > P o s i t i o n i n g
m e t h o d s .
P o s i t i o n i n g s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
P o s i t i o n i n g .
A b o u t s a t e l l i t e s i g n a l s
To use a specific positioning method to detect the
If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider
location of your device, select P o s i t i o n i n g m e t h o d s .
the following:
To select a positioning server, select P o s i t i o n i n g
•
If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better
signal.
s e r v e r .
•
•
If you are outdoors, move to a more open space.
If the weather conditions are bad, the signal
8 4
strength may be affected.
Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and
incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the
cartography that you download for use in this device.
To prevent the device from automatically downloading
outside your home cellular network, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > N e t w o r k > U s e n e t w o r k > O f f .
To receive a note when your device registers to a
network outside your home cellular network, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > N e t w o r k > R o a m i n g
w a r n i n g > O n . Contact your network service provider
for details and roaming costs.
N o k i a M a p s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > M a p s .
With Maps, you can see your current location on the
map, browse maps for different cities and countries,
search for addresses and different points of interest,
plan routes from one location to another, and save
locations as landmarks and send them to compatible
devices.
You can also purchase extra services, such as guides
and a turn-by-turn navigation service with voice
guidance.
When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to
define an internet access point for downloading map
information for your current location. To change the
access point later, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
N e t w o r k > D e f a u l t a c c e s s p o i n t .
To adjust the size of the cache that is used for saving
maps or voice guidance files, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s > N e t w o r k > M a x . m e m o r y c a r d u s e
( % ) . This option is available only when a compatible
memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the
oldest map data is deleted. The cache cannot be
emptied.
N o k i a M a p L o a d e r
D o w n l o a d m a p s
Nokia Map Loader is PC software that you can use to
download and install maps for different countries from
the internet to your device or a compatible memory
card. You can also use it to download voice files for
turn-by-turn navigation.
When you browse the map on the display, for example,
move to another country, a new map is downloaded
automatically. These downloaded maps are free of
charge, but downloading may involve the transmission
of large amounts of data through your service
provider's network. For more information on data
transmission charges, contact your service provider.
To use Nokia Map Loader, download it from
www.nokia.com/maps, and install it to a compatible
PC.
You can view the amount of transferred data from the
data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter
shows the amount of network traffic when you browse
maps, create routes, or search for locations online.
You must use Nokia Maps before using Nokia Map
Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history
information to check the version of map data to be
downloaded.
8 5
1. To download maps or voice guidance files with
Nokia Map Loader, connect your device to the PC
with a compatible USB data cable.
coordinates of your location with three satellites.
However, the accuracy is generally better when more
satellites are found.
2. Open Nokia Map Loader in your PC. Nokia Map
Loader checks the version of map data to be
downloaded.
B r o w s e m a p s
The map coverage varies by country.
3. Select the maps or voice guidance files you want to
install to your device.
When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in
to the location that was saved from your last session.
If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps
application zooms in to the capital city of the country
you are in based on the information the device receives
from the cellular network. At the same time, the map
of the location is downloaded, if it has not been
downloaded during previous sessions.
S a t e l l i t e i n f o r m a t i o n
The indicator
is shown on the display when you
browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS
connection, the circles are yellow and the icon is
blinking. When the device receives enough data from
the satellites to calculate the coordinates of your
current location, the icon stops blinking and turns
green.
To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your
current location, select O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > G P S
p o s i t i o n [ 0 ] . Your current location is indicated on the
map with
.
To check how many satellites your device found and
whether your device is receiving satellite signals from
the satellites, select O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s >
S a t e l l i t e i n f o .
To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right.
To zoom in or out, press * or # .
To switch between the 2-D and 3-D views, select
If your device found satellites, a bar is shown for each
satellite in the satellite information view. The longer
the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your
device has received enough data from the satellite
signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the
bar turns black.
O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s > 2 D / 3 D .
To find a location, select O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e .
To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting
point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its
details, or start navigation (extra service), press the
scroll key, and select the desired option.
Initially your device must receive signals from at least
four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of
your location. When the initial calculation has been
made, it may be possible to continue calculating the
To define what kinds of points of interest are shown
on the map, select O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s >
C a t e g o r i e s .
8 6
To take a screen shot of your location, select S a v e >
P l a n a r o u t e
A s i m a g e . The screen shot is saved in Gallery.
1. Scroll to a point on the map, press the scroll key,
To save a location as a landmark, press the scroll key
and select R o u t e f r o m .
and select S a v e > A s l a n d m a r k .
2. Scroll to S e l e c t , and select O p t i o n s > S e l e c t . To
adjust the routing settings, such as the mode of
transportation, select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
R o u t i n g .
To view saved landmarks, select O p t i o n s > F i n d
p l a c e > L a n d m a r k s .
To send a landmark to a compatible device, press the
scroll key, and select S e n d . If you send the landmark in
a text message, the information is converted to plain
text.
3. To select the destination, scroll to T o , and select
O p t i o n s > S e l e c t .
4. To view the route itinerary, select O p t i o n s > S h o w
r o u t e . The route is calculated using the selected
routing settings.
To adjust the network, routing, and general settings,
select O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
To view the itinerary route on the map, select
O p t i o n s > S h o w o n m a p .
F i n d a p l a c e
To view points of interest near your current location or
other locations on the map, select O p t i o n s > F i n d
p l a c e > N e a r b y and a category.
To run a simulation of the route, select O p t i o n s >
S t a r t s i m u l a t i o n .
To search for a point of interest by name, select
O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > K e y w o r d s e a r c h , or start
entering the first letters of the name, and select F i n d .
N a v i g a t i o n
To purchase a navigation service with voice guidance
to use in Maps, select O p t i o n s > E x t r a s e r v i c e s >
A d d n a v i g a t i o n .
To search for a location by address, select O p t i o n s >
F i n d p l a c e > B y a d d r e s s . You must enter the city and
country. To use an address you have saved to a contact
card in Contacts, select O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > B y
a d d r e s s > O p t i o n s > S e l e c t f r o m c o n t a c t s .
The licence you purchase is device-specific and cannot
be transferred from your device to another device.
After purchasing the navigation upgrade, the service is
available through Maps.
To view the search result on the map, press the scroll
When you use navigation for the first time, you are
prompted to select the language of the voice guidance
and download the voice guidance files of the selected
language. To change the language later, select
key, and select S h o w o n m a p .
To view a list of your previous locations, select
O p t i o n s > F i n d p l a c e > R e c e n t .
8 7
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > V o i c e g u i d a n c e .
To navigate to a destination using voice guidance,
create a route in Maps, and select O p t i o n s > S t a r t
n a v i g a t i o n . You can also start navigation by selecting
any location on the map or in a results list, and
N a v i g a t e t o .
To browse a downloaded guide, scroll to the my guides
tab, select a guide and a subcategory, if available.
G P S d a t a
To discard the created route and use another route,
Select M e n u > T o o l s > G P S d a t a .
select O p t i o n s > A l t e r n a t i v e r o u t e .
With GPS data, you can view your current location, find
To view only the next turns and hide the map, select
your way to a desired location, and track distance.
O p t i o n s > M a p o p t i o n s > N e x t t u r n s .
Select N a v i g a t i o n to view navigating information to
your trip destination, P o s i t i o n to view positioning
information about your current location, or T r i p d i s t .
to view your travelling information such as the
distance and duration you have travelled, and your
average and maximum speeds.
To stop navigation, select O p t i o n s > S t o p
n a v i g a t i o n .
G u i d e s
To purchase and download guides, select O p t i o n s >
E x t r a s e r v i c e s > G u i d e s . The guides provide
information about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and
other points of interest. The guides must be
The application must receive positioning information
from at least three satellites to be used as a travelling
aid.
The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding
errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by
availability and quality of GPS signals.
downloaded and purchased before use. The licence you
purchase is device-specific and cannot be transferred
from your device to another device.
To download a new guide to your device, scroll to the
nearest guides or all guides tab, select the desired
guide, and O K . The purchase process starts
automatically. You can pay for the guides through a
credit card or have the amount charged to your phone
bill, if supported by your cellular network service
provider.
To confirm the purchase, select O K twice. To receive a
confirmation of the purchase through e-mail, enter
your name and e-mail address, and select O K .
U s e G P S d a t a
To check the signal strength of the satellites that
provide the positioning information necessary for
navigation, open any of the three views and select
O p t i o n s > S a t e l l i t e s t a t u s .
To set a landmark or location as the destination of your
trip, select N a v i g a t i o n > O p t i o n s > S e t
d e s t i n a t i o n . You can also enter the destination
latitude and longitude coordinates.
8 8
To remove the destination set for your trip, select
your current location, U s e m a p to select the location
from a map, or E n t e r m a n u a l l y to fill in necessary
location information such as a name, category,
address, latitude, longitude, and altitude.
N a v i g a t i o n > O p t i o n s > S t o p n a v i g a t i o n .
To save your current position as a landmark, select
N a v i g a t i o n or P o s i t i o n , and O p t i o n s > S a v e
p o s i t i o n .
To show the landmark on the map, select O p t i o n s >
S h o w o n m a p .
To activate the trip meter, select T r i p d i s t . >
O p t i o n s > S t a r t . To stop the trip meter, select
O p t i o n s > S t o p .
E d i t l a n d m a r k s
To reset all fields and start calculating the trip again,
To edit a landmark, select O p t i o n s > E d i t >
select T r i p d i s t . > O p t i o n s > R e s t a r t .
O p t i o n s and from the following:
To change the measuring system in use, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > M e a s u r e m e n t s y s t e m >
M e t r i c or I m p e r i a l .
•
S e l e c t c a t e g o r i e s — Organise the landmark to a
group of similar landmarks. Select a category to
modify landmark information such as a name,
category, address, latitude, longitude, and altitude.
R e t r i e v e c u r r e n t p o s i t i o n — Request and
automatically fill in the geographical latitude and
longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your
current location.
To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude
received from the positioning satellites, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s > A l t i t u d e c a l i b r a t i o n .
•
•
•
•
•
•
D e l e t e — Remove the landmark.
L a n d m a r k s
L a n d m a r k i c o n — Change the icon of the landmark.
S h o w o n m a p — Show the landmark on the map.
S e n d — Send the landmark to compatible devices.
E d i t i n g o p t i o n s — Edit the phone numbers and URL
addresses assigned to the landmark.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > L a n d m a r k s .
Landmarks are coordinates to geographic locations
that you can save to your device for later use in
different location-based services. You can create
landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS accessory or network
(network service).
•
W r i t i n g l a n g u a g e — Change the writing language.
L a n d m a r k c a t e g o r i e s
You can see the landmark categories in two views: one
lists categories that already contain landmarks, and
the other lists all the categories your device has.
C r e a t e a l a n d m a r k
To create a landmark, select O p t i o n s > N e w
l a n d m a r k . Select C u r r e n t p o s i t i o n to make a network
request for the latitude and longitude coordinates of
8 9
To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll
to the category, and press the scroll key.
To create a new category, select O p t i o n s > E d i t
c a t e g o r i e s > O p t i o n s > N e w c a t e g o r y .
To move a landmark from one category to another,
open the landmarks tab, select the landmark, and
O p t i o n s > A d d t o c a t e g o r y . Select the old category
to remove the mark next to it. Select the category or
categories to which you want to add the landmark.
Select A c c e p t .
R e c e i v e l a n d m a r k s
Select M e n u > M e s s a g i n g .
Open a message that contains a landmark you have
received from another device. Scroll to the landmark,
and press the scroll key.
To save the landmark in your device, select O p t i o n s >
S a v e .
To forward the landmark to compatible devices, select
O p t i o n s > S e n d .
To show the received landmark on the map, select
O p t i o n s > S h o w o n m a p .
To find out how to navigate to the received landmark,
select O p t i o n s > S h o w r o u t e .
9 0
C o n n e c t i v i t y
Your device offers several options to connect to the
internet, a corporate intranet, or to another device or
computer.
N o k i a P C S u i t e
You can install Nokia PC Suite from the CD-ROM or from
the web. Nokia PC Suite can be used with Windows
2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista. With Nokia PC
Suite, you can make backups, synchronise your device
with a compatible computer, move files between your
device and a compatible computer, or use your device
as a modem.
F a s t d o w n l o a d i n g
High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called
3.5G, indicated by
) is a network service in UMTS
networks and provides high-speed data downloads.
When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the
device is connected to a UMTS network that supports
HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail,
and browser pages through the cellular network may
be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by
. The icon may vary between regions.
For more information about Nokia PC Suite, see the
Nokia PC Suite guide.
D a t a c a b l e
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > U S B .
You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in the
Using a USB data cable, you can connect your device to
a compatible computer. Install Nokia PC Suite to your
computer before you use a cable connection, as Nokia
PC Suite automatically installs the USB data cable driver
to your computer. You can use the D a t a t r a n s f e r mode
without installing the USB data cable drivers.
device settings.
For availability and subscription to data connection
services, contact your service provider.
HSDPA only affects the download speed; sending data
to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not
affected.
Connect the cable to the USB connector of the device.
To change the USB mode you normally use with the
data cable, select U S B m o d e > P C S u i t e or D a t a
t r a n s f e r .
9 1
To set the device to ask for the mode each time you
connect the USB data cable to the device, select A s k o n
c o n n e c t i o n > Y e s .
3. Switch on infrared on the other device and wait a
few seconds until the infrared connection is
established.
T r a n s f e r d a t a f r o m a c o m p u t e r
4. Locate the desired file in an application or File
manager, and select O p t i o n s > S e n d > V i a
i n f r a r e d .
1. Make sure that you have selected USB as a
connection type in the Manage connections
settings in Nokia PC Suite.
If the data transfer is not started within 1 minute after
the activation of the infrared port, the connection is
cancelled and must be started again.
2. Insert a memory card to your device and connect
the device to a compatible computer with the USB
data cable.
All items received through infrared are placed in the
Inbox folder in Messaging.
3. When the device asks which mode is used, select
D a t a t r a n s f e r . In this mode, you can see your
Positioning the devices away from each other breaks
device as a removable hard drive in your computer. the connection, but the infrared light beam remains
active on your device until it deactivates.
4. End the connection from the computer (for
example, from an Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard
in Windows) to avoid damaging the memory card.
B l u e t o o t h
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h .
I n f r a r e d
Do not point the infrared (IR) beam at anyone's eye or
allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device
is a Class 1 laser product.
A b o u t B l u e t o o t h
Bluetooth technology enables wireless connections
between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres
(33 feet). A Bluetooth connection can be used to send
images, videos, text, business cards, calendar notes, or
to connect wirelessly to devices that use Bluetooth
technology.
Use infrared to connect two devices and transfer data
between them. With infrared, you can transfer data
such as business cards, calendar notes, and media files
with a compatible device.
1. Ensure that the infrared ports of the devices face
each other. The positioning of the devices is more
important than the angle or distance.
Since devices using Bluetooth technology
communicate using radio waves, your device and the
other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight.
The two devices only need to be within a maximum of
10 metres of each other, although the connection can
2. Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > I n f r a r e d to switch
9 2
on infrared on your device.
be subject to interference from obstructions such as
walls or other electronic devices.
2. Select B l u e t o o t h > O n .
3. Select M y p h o n e ' s v i s i b i l i t y > S h o w n t o a l l or
D e f i n e p e r i o d . If you select D e f i n e p e r i o d , you
need to define the time during which your device
is visible to others. Your device and the name you
entered can now be seen by other users with
devices using Bluetooth technology.
Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time.
For example, if your device is connected to a headset,
you can also transfer files to another compatible device
at the same time.
This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification
2.0 supporting the following profiles: Dial-up
Networking Profile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer
Profile, Handsfree Profile, Headset Profile, Basic
Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, Generic Object
Exchange Profile, Generic Access Profile, Generic Audio/
Video Distribution Profile, Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile, and Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile. To
ensure interoperability between other devices
supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved
enhancements for this model. Check with the
manufacturers of other devices to determine their
compatibility with this device.
4. Open the application where the item you want to
send is stored.
5. Select the item, and select O p t i o n s > S e n d > V i a
B l u e t o o t h . The device searches for other devices
using Bluetooth technology within range and lists
them.
T i p : If you have sent data using Bluetooth
before, a list of the previous search results is
displayed. To search for more Bluetooth
devices, select M o r e d e v i c e s .
6. Select the device with which you want to connect.
If the other device requires pairing before data can
be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode.
Features using Bluetooth technology increase the
demand on battery power and reduce the battery life.
There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth
technology in some locations. Check with your local
authorities or service provider.
When the connection has been established, S e n d i n g
d a t a is shown.
The Sent folder in the Messaging application does not
store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity.
To receive data using Bluetooth, select B l u e t o o t h >
O n and M y p h o n e ' s v i s i b i l i t y > S h o w n t o a l l to
receive data from a non-paired device or H i d d e n to
receive data from a paired device only. When you
receive data through Bluetooth, atonesounds, and you
are asked if you want to accept the message in which
the data is included. If you accept, the message is
placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application.
S e n d a n d r e c e i v e d a t a w i t h
B l u e t o o t h
1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you
are asked to give a name to your device. Give your
device a unique name to make it easy to recognise
if there are several Bluetooth devices in the vicinity.
9 3
T i p : You can access the files in the device or on
the memory card using a compatible accessory
that supports the File Transfer Profile Client
service (for example, a laptop computer).
3. Select Y e s to make the connection between your
device and the other device automatic, or N o to
confirm the connection manually every time a
connection attempt is made. After pairing, the
device is saved to the paired devices page.
To give a nickname to the paired device, select
O p t i o n s > A s s i g n s h o r t n a m e . The nickname is only
displayed in your device.
To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairing you
want to delete and O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . To delete all
pairings, select O p t i o n s > D e l e t e a l l . If you are
currently connected to a device and cancel the pairing
with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and
the connection is ended.
A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically
after sending or receiving data. Only Nokia PC Suite and
some enhancements such as headsets may maintain a
connection even if not actively used.
P a i r d e v i c e s
Open the paired devices tab.
Before pairing, create your own passcode (1-16 digits),
and agree with the user of the other device to use the
same code. Devices that do not have a user interface
have a fixed passcode. You need the passcode only
when you connect the devices for the first time. After
pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection.
Pairing and authorising the connection makes
connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to
accept the connection between paired devices every
time you establish a connection.
To allow a paired device to connect automatically to
your device, select S e t a s a u t h o r i s e d . Connections
between your device and the other device can be made
without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or
authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own
devices, such as your compatible headset or computer,
or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you
want to accept connection requests from the other
device separately every time, select S e t a s
The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16
u n a u t h o r i s e d .
digits.
To use a Bluetooth audio enhancement such as a
Bluetooth handsfree or headset, you need to pair your
device with the enhancement. See the enhancement
user guide for the passcode and further instructions.
To connect to the audio enhancement, switch on the
enhancement. Some audio enhancements connect
automatically to your device. Otherwise open the
paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and
select O p t i o n s > C o n n e c t t o a u d i o d e v i c e .
1. Select O p t i o n s > N e w p a i r e d d e v i c e . The device
starts to search for Bluetooth devices within range.
If you have sent data using Bluetooth before, a list
of the previous searchresults isdisplayed. To search
for more Bluetooth devices, select M o r e d e v i c e s .
2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and
enter the passcode. The same passcode must be
entered to the other device as well.
9 4
2. Activate Bluetooth in the car kit.
S e c u r i t y t i p s
3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible
devices. For instructions, see the user guide of your
car kit.
When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select
B l u e t o o t h > O f f or M y p h o n e ' s v i s i b i l i t y >
H i d d e n .
4. Select your device from the list of compatible
Do not pair with an unknown device.
devices.
5. To pair the devices, enter the Bluetooth passcode
shown on the display of the car kit to your device.
S I M a c c e s s p r o f i l e
T i p : If you have already accessed the SIM card
from the car kit with the active user profile, the
car kit searches automatically for a device with
the SIM card. If it finds your device, and
With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card
of your device from a compatible car kit device. This
way, you do not need a separate SIM card to access SIM
card data and connect to the GSM network.
automatic authorisation is activated, the car kit
automatically connects to the GSM network
when you switch on the car ignition.
To use the SIM access profile, you need the following:
•
Compatible car kit device that supports Bluetooth
When you activate the remote SIM access profile, you
can use applications on your device that do not need
network or SIM services.
To make connections between your device and the car
kit without separate acceptance or authorisation,
select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h , and open
the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the
scroll key, and enter the Bluetooth passcode. When the
device asks to make the connection automatic, select
Y e s . If you select N o , connection requests from this car
kit must be accepted separately every time.
wireless technology
•
Valid SIM card in your device
When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode,
you can only use a compatible connected
enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls.
Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to
the emergency numbersprogrammed into your device,
while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you
must first leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has
been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first.
For more information about car kit devices and
compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site
and your car kit user guide.
To end the remote SIM access connection from your
device, select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h >
R e m o t e S I M m o d e > O f f .
U s e t h e S I M a c c e s s p r o f i l e
1. Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h >
9 5
R e m o t e S I M m o d e > O n .
applicable safety requirements when establishing and
using a WLAN connection.
W i r e l e s s L A N
If you move the device to another location within the
WLAN and out of range of a WLAN access point, the
roaming functionality can automatically connect your
device to another access point thatbelongsto the same
WLAN. As long as you remain within range of access
points that belong to the same network, your device
can stay connected to the network.
Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use
of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for
more information.
Your device can detect and connect to a wireless local
area network (WLAN). To use WLAN, a network must be
available in the location and your device must be
connected to it.
T i p : To check the unique media access control
(MAC) address that identifies your device, for
example to configure the MAC address of your
device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# on
the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on
the device display.
W L A N c o n n e c t i o n s
I m p o r t a n t : Always enable one of the available
encryption methods to increase the security of your
wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the
risk of unauthorised access to your data.
S e e W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y
To have your device show WLAN availability, select
M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
W i r e l e s s L A N > S h o w W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y .
To use WLAN, you must create an internet access point
in a WLAN. Use the access point for applications that
need to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is
established when you create a data connection using
a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connection is
ended when you end the data connection. You can also
end the connection manually. See "Connection
manager," p. 100.
If WLAN is available,
is shown on the display.
T i p : You can also scan for networks in range.
You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet
data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN
access point device at a time, but several applications
can use the same internet access point.
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > W L A N w i z . .
The WLAN wizard helps you find and connect to a
wireless LAN. When you open the application, your
device starts to scan for available WLANs and lists them.
When the device is in the Offline profile, you can still
use WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any
9 6
To update the list of available WLANs, select O p t i o n s > To start a search for
R e f r e s h .
available WLANs, scroll to
the row showing the status,
press the scroll key, and
select S e a r c h f o r W L A N . To
set WLAN scanning off, scroll
to the row showing the
status, press the scroll key,
and select S w i t c h W L A N
s c a n o f f .
To start or continue browsing the web using the access
point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired network, and
select O p t i o n s > S t a r t W e b b r o w s i n g or C o n t . W e b
b r o w s i n g .
To disconnect the active connection to the WLAN, select
O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t W L A N .
To view the details of the WLAN, select O p t i o n s >
D e t a i l s .
When S t a r t W e b b r o w s i n g
is selected, the WLAN wizard
To save the access point of the WLAN, select O p t i o n s >
automatically creates an
D e f i n e a c c e s s p o i n t .
access point for the selected
Always enable one of the available encryption methods
to increase the security of your WLANconnection. Using
encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to
your data.
WLAN. The access point can also be used with other
applications requiring WLAN connection.
If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter
the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden
network, you must enter the correct service set
identifier (SSID).
U s e t h e w i z a r d i n t h e a c t i v e s t a n d b y m o d e
In the active standby mode, the WLAN wizard shows
the status of your WLAN connections and network
searches. To view the available options, scroll to the
row showing the status, and press the scroll key.
Depending on the status, you can start the Web
browser using a WLAN connection, disconnect from a
WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning
on or off.
If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to
any WLAN, W L A N s c a n n i n g o f f is displayed in the
active standby mode. To set scanning on and search for
available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status,
and press the scroll key.
I n t e r n e t a c c e s s p o i n t s
An internet access point is a collection of settings,
which define how the device creates a data connection
to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services
or to browse web pages, you must first define access
points for these services.
Some or all access points may be preset for your device
by your service provider, and you may not be able to
create, edit, or remove them.
9 7
•
H o m e p a g e — Enter the web address of the page
you want to display as the home page when you
use this access point.
S e t u p a n i n t e r n e t a c c e s s
p o i n t f o r p a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S )
4. After defining the settings, select O p t i o n s >
A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s to define the advanced
settings or B a c k to save the settings and exit.
1. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >
C o n n e c t i o n > A c c e s s p o i n t s .
2. Select O p t i o n s > N e w a c c e s s p o i n t to create a
new access point, or select an existing access point
from the list and then O p t i o n s > D u p l i c a t e a c c e s s
p o i n t to use the access point as a basis for the new
one.
A d v a n c e d i n t e r n e t a c c e s s
p o i n t s e t t i n g s f o r p a c k e t
d a t a ( G P R S )
3. Define the following settings.
•
C o n n e c t i o n n a m e — Enter a descriptive name
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
for the connection.
A c c e s s p o i n t s .
•
•
D a t a b e a r e r — Select P a c k e t d a t a .
After setting up a basic internet access point for packet
data (GPRS), select O p t i o n s > A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s ,
and define the following advanced settings:
A c c e s s p o i n t n a m e — Enter the name for the
access point. The name is usually provided by
your service provider.
•
•
U s e r n a m e — Enter your user name if required
by the service provider. User names are often
case-sensitive and provided by your service
provider.
•
N e t w o r k t y p e — Select I P v 4 or I P v 6 as the internet
protocol type. The internet protocol defines how
data is transferred to and from your device.
P h o n e I P a d d r e s s — Enter the IP address of your
device. Select A u t o m a t i c to have the network
provide the device IP address. This setting is shown
only if you select N e t w o r k t y p e > I P v 4 .
•
P r o m p t p a s s w o r d — Select Y e s to enter your
password each time you log into a server or N o
to save the password in your device memory and
automate the login.
•
•
D N S a d d r e s s — Select P r i m a r y D N S a d d r e s s and
S e c o n d a r y D N S a d d r e s s and enter their IP
addresses, if required by your service provider.
Otherwise, the name server addresses are provided
automatically.
•
•
P a s s w o r d — Enter your password if required by
the service provider. The password is often case-
sensitive and provided by the service provider.
A u t h e n t i c a t i o n — Select S e c u r e to send your
password always encrypted, or N o r m a l to send
your password encrypted when possible.
P r o x y s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the address of the
proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers
used by some service providers between a browsing
service and its users. These servers may provide
9 8
additional security and speed up access to the
service.
•
W L A N s e c u r i t y m o d e — You must select the
same security mode that is used in the WLAN
access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent
privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected
access), you must also configure the relevant
additional settings. See the device help for more
information.
S e t u p a n a c c e s s p o i n t f o r
W L A N m a n u a l l y
•
•
W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s — Edit the security
settings for the selected security mode.
H o m e p a g e — Enter the web addressof thepage
you want to display as the home page when you
use this access point.
1. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >
C o n n e c t i o n > A c c e s s p o i n t s .
2. Select O p t i o n s > N e w a c c e s s p o i n t to create a
new access point, or select an existing access point
from the list and then O p t i o n s > D u p l i c a t e a c c e s s
p o i n t to use the access point as a basis for the new
one.
To set up a WLAN access point automatically, use the
WLAN wizard. Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > W L A N
w i z . .
3. Define the following settings.
•
C o n n e c t i o n n a m e — Enter a descriptive name
for the connection.
A d v a n c e d a c c e s s p o i n t
s e t t i n g s f o r W L A N
•
•
D a t a b e a r e r — Select W i r e l e s s L A N .
W L A N n e t w o r k n a m e — To enter the service
set identifier (SSID), that is, the name that
identifies the specific WLAN, select E n t e r
m a n u a l l y . To select the network from the
WLANs in range, select S e a r c h f o r n e t w o r k s .
N e t w o r k s t a t u s — Select H i d d e n if the network
you are connecting to is hidden or P u b l i c if it is
not hidden.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
A c c e s s p o i n t s .
After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select
O p t i o n s > A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s , and define the
following advanced settings:
•
•
•
•
•
I P v 4 s e t t i n g s — Enter the device IP and name
server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol.
I P v 6 s e t t i n g s — Select or enter the name server
addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol.
W L A N n e t w o r k m o d e — If you select
I n f r a s t r u c t u r e , devices can communicate with
each other and with wired LAN devices through
a WLAN access point. If you select A d - h o c ,
devices can send and receive data directly with
each other, and no WLAN access point is needed.
A d - h o c c h a n n e l — The channel is usually chosen
automatically. To enter the channel number (1-11)
manually, select U s e r d e f i n e d .
9 9
•
•
P r o x y s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the proxy server
If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer,
initiate the connection from the computer.
address.
P r o x y p o r t n u m b e r — Enter the proxy server port
You may not be able to use some of the other
communication features when the device is used as a
modem.
number.
M o d e m
C o n n e c t i o n m a n a g e r
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > M o d e m .
Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > C o n n . m g r . .
Together with a compatible computer, you can use
your device as a modem to connect to the web, for
example.
V i e w a n d e n d a c t i v e
c o n n e c t i o n s
B e f o r e y o u c a n u s e y o u r d e v i c e a s a m o d e m
•
•
•
You need an appropriate data communications
software on your computer, such as Nokia PC Suite.
For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite guide.
To see the open data connections, select A c t i v e d a t a
c o n n e c t i o n s .
You must subscribe to the appropriate network
services from your service provider or internet
service provider.
To view detailed information about network
connections, select a connection from the list and
O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s . The type of information shown
depends on the connection type.
You must have the appropriate drivers installed on
your computer. You must install drivers for the cable
connection, and you may need to install or update
Bluetooth or infrared drivers.
To end the selected network connection, select
O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t .
To end all active network connections simultaneously,
To connect the device to a compatible computer using
infrared, press the scroll key. Make sure the infrared
ports of the device and computer are directly facing
each other with no obstacles between them.
To connect your device to a computer using Bluetooth
wireless technology, initiate the connection from the
computer. To activate Bluetooth in your device, select
M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h and select
B l u e t o o t h > O n .
select O p t i o n s > D i s c o n n e c t a l l .
S e a r c h f o r W L A N
To search for WLANs available within range, select
A v a i l a b l e W L A N n e t w o r k s . The available WLANs are
listed with their network mode (infrastructure or ad-
hoc), signal strength, and network encryption
1 0 0
indicators, and whether your device has an active
connection with the network.
To view the details of a network, scroll to it, and press
the scroll key.
To create an internet access point for a network, select
O p t i o n s > D e f i n e a c c e s s p o i n t .
1 0 1
S e c u r i t y a n d d a t a m a n a g e m e n t
Manage the data and software on your device, and take selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll
care of the security of the device and its contents.
key.
To change the lock code, select M e n u > T o o l s >
S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > S e c u r i t y > P h o n e a n d S I M
c a r d > L o c k c o d e . Enter the old code and then the
new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters
long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and both
uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible.
I m p o r t a n t : Your device can only support one
antivirus application. Having more than one
application with antivirus functionality could affect
performance and operation or cause the device to stop
functioning.
You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text
message to the device. To enable remote locking and
to define the text for the message, select M e n u >
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > S e c u r i t y > P h o n e
a n d S I M c a r d > A l l o w r e m o t e l o c k > Y e s . Enter the
remote lock message and confirm the message. The
message must be at least 5 characters long.
L o c k t h e d e v i c e
I m p o r t a n t : If the device has been locked, enter
the lock code to activate the phone function. When the
device is locked, calls may be possible to the official
emergency number. Making an emergency call in the
offline profile or when the device is locked requires
that the device recognise the number to be an official
emergency number. It is advisable to change the
profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code
before you make the emergency call.
To prevent access to the contents of your device, lock
the device in the standby mode. Press the power key,
select L o c k p h o n e , and enter your lock code. The
default lock code is 12345. To unlock, press the left
M e m o r y c a r d s e c u r i t y
Select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y .
You can protect a memory card with a password to
prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, select
O p t i o n s > S e t p a s s w o r d . The password can be up to
8 characters long and is case-sensitive. The password
is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it
again while you use the memory card on the same
device. If you use the memory card on another device,
1 0 2
you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards
support password protection.
numbers. All phone numbers to which calls are
allowed must start with this country prefix.
2. Select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e f i x e d d i a l l i n g . You
need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate
fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts.
Contact your service provider if you do not have the
code. To cancel the service, select O p t i o n s >
D e a c t i v a t e f i x e d d i a l l i n g .
To remove the memory card password, select
O p t i o n s > R e m o v e p a s s w o r d . When you remove the
password, the data on the memory card is not
protected against unauthorised use.
To open a locked memory card, select O p t i o n s >
U n l o c k m e m o r y c a r d . Enter the password.
T i p : To send text messages to the SIM contacts
while the fixed dialling service is active, you
need to add the text message centre number to
the fixed dialling list.
If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked
memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case
the card is unlocked and password removed.
Formatting a memory card destroys all data stored on
the card.
C e r t i f i c a t e m a n a g e r
F i x e d d i a l l i n g
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
S e c u r i t y > C e r t i f i c a t e m a n a g e m e n t .
Select M e n u > C o n t a c t s > O p t i o n s > S I M
c o n t a c t s > F i x e d d i a l c o n t a c t s .
Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of
software but do not guarantee safety. There are three
different types of certificates: authority certificates,
personal certificates, and server certificates. During a
secure connection, a server may send a server
certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked
through an authority certificate stored on your device.
You receive notification if the identity of the server is
not authentic or if you do not have the correct
certificate in your device.
With the fixed dialling service, you can restrict calls
from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM
cards support the fixed dialling service. Contact your
service provider for more information.
When fixed dialling is activated, calls may be possible
to the official emergency number programmed into
your device.
1. To restrict calls from your device, select O p t i o n s >
N e w S I M c o n t a c t and enter the contact name and
phone number to the list of numbers to which calls
are allowed, or select A d d f r o m C o n t a c t s to copy
the contact from Contacts. To restrict calls by a
country prefix, enter the country prefix in the list of
Download a certificate from a web site, or receive a
certificate as an e-mail attachment, or as a message
sent through a Bluetooth or infrared connection.
Certificates should be used when you connect to an
online bank or a remote server to transfer confidential
1 0 3
information. They should also be used if you want to
reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software,
and to check the authenticity of software when you
download and install software to your device.
I m p o r t a n t : Even if the use of certificates makes
the risks involved in remote connections and software
installation considerably smaller, they must be used
correctly in order to benefit from increased security.
The existence of a certificate does not offer any
protection by itself; the certificate manager must
contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for
increased security to be available. Certificates have a
restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate
not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should
be valid, check that the current date and time in your
device are correct.
T i p : When you add a new certificate, check its
authenticity.
V i e w c e r t i f i c a t e d e t a i l s
You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server
when the signature and the validity period of a server
certificate have been checked.
To change the trust settings, select a certificate and
O p t i o n s > T r u s t s e t t i n g s . Select an application field
and press the scroll key to select Y e s or N o . You cannot
change the trust settings of a personal certificate.
To view certificate details, select V i e w d e t a i l s .
One of the following notes may appear:
•
C e r t i f i c a t e n o t t r u s t e d — You have not set any
application to use the certificate. You may want to
change the trust settings.
Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that
can use the certificate is displayed:
•
•
•
E x p i r e d c e r t i f i c a t e — The period of validity has
ended for the selected certificate.
•
S y m b i a n i n s t a l l a t i o n — New Symbian operating
system application.
C e r t i f i c a t e n o t v a l i d y e t — The period of validity
has not yet begun for the selected certificate.
C e r t i f i c a t e c o r r u p t e d — The certificate cannot be
used. Contact the certificate issuer.
•
•
•
I n t e r n e t — E-mail and graphics.
A p p . i n s t a l l a t i o n — New Java™ application.
O n l i n e c e r t i f . c h e c k — Online certificate status
protocol.
C e r t i f i c a t e t r u s t s e t t i n g s
S e c u r i t y m o d u l e s
Trusting a certificate means that you authorise it to
verify web pages, e-mail servers, software packages,
and other data. Only trusted certificates can be used to
verify services and software.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
S e c u r i t y > S e c u r i t y m o d u l e .
1 0 4
V i e w a n d e d i t s e c u r i t y
m o d u l e s
R e m o t e c o n f i g u r a t i o n
Select M e n u > T o o l s > D e v i c e m g r . .
To view or edit a security module, scroll to it, and press
With Device manager, you can manage settings, data,
the scroll key.
and software on your device remotely.
To view detailed information about a security module,
You can connect to a server, and receive configuration
settings for your device. You may receive server profiles
and different configuration settings from your service
providers or company information management
department. Configuration settings may include
connection and other settings used by different
applications in your device. The available options may
vary.
select O p t i o n s > S e c u r i t y d e t a i l s .
To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select
M o d u l e P I N to edit the PIN code for the security
module or S i g n i n g P I N to edit the PIN code for digital
signatures. You may not be able to change these codes
for all security modules.
The key store contains the contents of the security
module. To delete the key store, select K e y s t o r e ,
select the desired key store, and O p t i o n s > D e l e t e .
You may not be able to delete the key store of all
security modules.
The remote configuration connection is usually started
by the server when the device settings need to be
updated.
To create a new server profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w
s e r v e r p r o f i l e .
You may receive these settings from your service
provider in a configuration message. If not, define the
following:
B a c k u p d a t a
It is recommended to back up device memory regularly
•
•
•
•
•
S e r v e r n a m e — Enter a name for the configuration
to the memory card or a compatible computer.
server.
To back up information from the device memory to a
memory card, select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y >
O p t i o n s > B a c k u p p h o n e m e m o r y .
S e r v e r I D — Enter the unique ID to identify the
configuration server.
S e r v e r p a s s w o r d — Enter a password to identify
your device to the server.
To restore information from the memory card to the
device memory, select M e n u > T o o l s > M e m o r y >
O p t i o n s > R e s t o r e f r o m c a r d .
S e s s i o n m o d e — Select the preferred connection
type.
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point to use for
the connection, or create a new access point. You
You can also connect your device to a compatible
1 0 5
computer and use Nokia PC Suite to back up data.
can also choose to be asked for the access point
every time you start a connection.
A p p l i c a t i o n m a n a g e r
•
H o s t a d d r e s s — Enter the web address of the
configuration server.
•
•
P o r t — Enter the port number of the server.
U s e r n a m e — Enter your user ID for the
configuration server.
Select M e n u > I n s t a l l a t i o n s > A p p . m g r . .
You can install two types of applications and software
•
•
•
P a s s w o r d — Enter your password for the
configuration server.
on your device:
•
•
Applications and software specifically intended for
your device or compatible with the Symbian
operating system. These software installation files
have the extension .sis or .sisx.
A l l o w c o n f i g u r a t i o n — Select Y e s to allow the
server to initiate a configuration session.
A u t o - a c c e p t a l l r e q u e s t s — Select Y e s if you do not
want the server to ask for your confirmation when
it initiates a configuration session.
J2ME™ applications compatible with the Symbian
operating system. The Java application installation
file extensions are .jad or .jar.
•
•
•
N e t w o r k a u t h e n t i c a t i o n — Select whether to use
http authentication. This setting is available only if
you have selected internet as the bearer type.
N e t w o r k u s e r n a m e — Enter your user ID for the
http authentication. This setting is available only if
you have selected internet as the bearer type.
N e t w o r k p a s s w o r d — Enter your password for the
http authentication. This setting is available only if
you have selected internet as the bearer type.
Installation files may be transferred to your device
from a compatible computer, downloaded during
browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as
an e-mail attachment, or with Bluetooth.
During the installation, the device checks the integrity
of the package to be installed. The device shows
information about the checks being carried out, and
you are given options to continue or cancel the
installation.
To connect to the server and receive configuration
settings for your device, select O p t i o n s > S t a r t
c o n f i g u r a t i o n .
If you install applications that require a network
connection, note that the power consumption of your
device may increase when you use these applications.
To view the configuration log of the selected profile,
select O p t i o n s > V i e w l o g .
T i p : When browsing web pages, you can
download an installation file and install it
immediately. Note, however, that the
connection runs in the background during the
installation.
1 0 6
I n s t a l l a p p l i c a t i o n s
I n s t a l l a t i o n s e t t i n g s
To modify the installation settings, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s and from the following:
I m p o r t a n t : Only install and use applications
and other software from trusted sources, such as
applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed
•
D e l e t e — The software package installation file is
deleted from the device after the installation. If you
download software packages using the Web
browser, this may help reduce the amount of
storage space required. If you want to store the
software package file for possible reinstallation, do
not select this option, or make sure that you have a
copy of the software package file stored on a
compatible computer or on a CD-ROM.
TM
the Java Verified testing.
To download and install software from the web, select
D o w n l o a d a p p l i c a t i o n s . Select the application and
O p t i o n s > I n s t a l l .
To view the details of an installed software package,
select the application and O p t i o n s > V i e w d e t a i l s .
•
•
S e l e c t l a n g u a g e : — If the software package
contains several language versions of the software,
select the language version that you want to install.
T y p e — Specify what kind of applications you want
installed. You may choose to install only
To view the installation log, select O p t i o n s > V i e w
l o g . A list shows what software has been installed and
removed, and the date of the installation or removal.
If you encounter problems with the device after
installing a software package, use this list to find out
which software package may be the cause of the
problem. The information in this list may also help you
pinpoint problems that are caused by software
packages that are incompatible with each other.
applications with validated certificates. This setting
applies only to Symbian operating system
applications (.sis or .sisx files).
To remove software, select O p t i o n s > R e m o v e . If you
remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the
original software package file, or by restoring a full
backup that contains the removed software package.
If you remove a software package, you may no longer
be able to open files created with that software. If
another software package depends on the software
package that you removed, the other software package
may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the
installed software package for details.
J a v a s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s
To specify security settings for a Java application, select
O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s .
You can define which functions the Java application can
access. The value that you can set for each functionality
depends on the protection domain of the software
package.
•
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select an access point that the
application may use when making network
connections.
1 0 7
•
•
•
•
•
•
N e t w o r k a c c e s s — Allow the application to create
a data connection to the network.
•
N o t a l l o w e d — Prevent the Java application from
using the functionality.
M e s s a g i n g — Allow the application to send
messages.
A p p l i c a t i o n a u t o - s t a r t — Allow the application to
start automatically.
A c t i v a t i o n k e y s
C o n n e c t i v i t y — Allow the application to activate a
data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection.
M u l t i m e d i a — Allow the application to use the
multimedia features of your device.
R e a d u s e r d a t a — Allow the application to read
your calendar entries, contacts, or any other
personal data.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > A c t v . k e y s .
Some media files, such as images, music, or video clips,
are protected by digital usage rights. The activation
keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For
example, with some activation keys you may listen to
a music track only a limited number of times. During
one playback session you may rewind, fast-forward, or
pause the track, but once you stop it, you have used
one of the instances allowed.
•
•
•
E d i t u s e r d a t a — Allow the application to add
personal data, such as entries to Contacts.
P o s i t i o n i n g — Allow the application to use the
location data in your device.
L a n d m a r k s — Allow the application to use the
landmarks in your device.
U s e a c t i v a t i o n k e y s
Digital rights management (DRM) protected content
comes with an associated activation key that defines
your rights to use the content.
You can define how you are prompted to confirm the
Java application's access to the device functions. Select
one of the following values:
If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back
up both the activation keys and the content, use the
backup feature of ["Nokia PC Suite" or "Nokia Nseries
PC Suite; insert the applicable one, and delete
•
A s k e v e r y t i m e — Require the Java application to
ask for your confirmation each time it uses the
functionality.
•
•
A s k f i r s t t i m e — Require the Java application to ask
for initial confirmation to use the functionality.
A l w a y s a l l o w e d — Allow the Java application to
use the functionality without your confirmation.
The security settings help protect your device
against harmful Java applications that may use the
functions of your device without your permission.
Only select A l w a y s a l l o w e d if you know the
supplier and trustworthiness of the application.
brackets]. Other transfer methods may not transfer the
activation keys which need to be restored with the
content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA
DRM-protected content after the device memory is
formatted. You may also need to restore the activation
keys in case the files on your device get corrupted.
If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the
1 0 8
activation keys and the content will be lost if the device
memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . If there are several rights related
keys and the content if the files on your device get
corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content
may limit your ability to use the same content on your
device again. For more information, contact your
service provider.
to the same media file, all the rights are deleted.
The group key view displays all of the files related to a
group right. If you have downloaded multiple media
files with the same rights, they are all displayed in this
view. You can open the groupview from eitherthevalid
keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the
group rights folder.
Some activation keys may be connected to a specific
SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed
only if the SIM card is inserted in the device.
To view your activation keys by type, select V a l i d
D a t a s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n
k e y s , I n v a l i d k e y s , or N o t i n u s e .
To view the key details, select O p t i o n s > K e y
d e t a i l s .
The following details are displayed for each media file:
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S y n c .
•
•
•
S t a t u s — The status is A c t i v a t i o n k e y i s v a l i d ,
A c t i v a t i o n k e y e x p i r e d , or A c t i v a t i o n k e y n o t y e t
v a l i d .
With Sync, you can synchronise your contacts, calendar
entries, notes, or mailboxes with corresponding
applications on a compatible computer or remote
internet server. Your synchronisation settings are
saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application
uses SyncML technology for remote synchronisation.
For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the
supplier of the applications with which you want to
synchronise your device.
C o n t e n t s e n d i n g — A l l o w e d means that you can
send the file to another device. N o t a l l o w e d means
that you cannot send the file to another device.
C o n t e n t i n p h o n e — Y e s means that the file is in
the device and the path of the file is displayed. N o
means that the related file is not currently in the
device.
You may receive the synchronisation settings as a
message from your service provider. The available
applications you can synchronise may vary. Contact
your service provider for more information.
To activate a key, go to the Activation keys main view,
and select I n v a l i d k e y s > O p t i o n s > G e t a c t i v a t i o n
k e y . Establish a network connectionatthe prompt, and
you are directed to a web site where you can purchase
rights to the media.
To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the
keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select
1 0 9
•
•
S e r v e r v e r s i o n — Select the SyncML version you can
use with the remote server.
C r e a t e a s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n
p r o f i l e
There is a Nokia PC Suite synchronisation profile
available in your device. You do not need to edit it if
you synchronise your device with a computer using
Nokia PC Suite.
To create a new profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w s y n c
p r o f i l e and assign a name for the profile, select the
applications to synchronise with the profile, and
specify the needed connection settings. Contact your
service provider for details.
S e r v e r I D — Enter the server ID of the remote server.
This setting is only available if you select 1.2 as the
SyncML version.
•
•
D a t a b e a r e r — Select the data bearer to connect to
the remote server during synchronisation.
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point to use for
the synchronisation connection, or create a new
access point. You can also choose to be asked for the
access point every time you start synchronising.
H o s t a d d r e s s — Enter the web address of the server
that contains the database with which you want to
synchronise your device.
•
•
•
•
•
P o r t — Enter the port number of the remote
database server.
S e l e c t a p p l i c a t i o n s t o
s y n c h r o n i s e
U s e r n a m e — Enter your user name to identify your
device to the server.
P a s s w o r d — Enter your password to identify your
device to the server.
1. To select the applications to synchronise with a
synchronisation profile, select O p t i o n s > E d i t
s y n c p r o f i l e > A p p l i c a t i o n s .
A l l o w s y n c r e q u e s t s — To allow synchronisation
to start from the remote database server, select
Y e s .
2. Select the desired application, and select I n c l u d e
i n s y n c > Y e s .
•
•
A c c e p t a l l s y n c r e q u e s t s — To have your device ask
for your confirmation before accepting
synchronisation from the server, select N o .
N e t w o r k a u t h e n t i c a t i o n — To authenticate your
device to the network before synchronisation, select
Y e s . Enter your network user name and network
password.
3. Specify the R e m o t e d a t a b a s e and
S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n t y p e settings.
S y n c h r o n i s a t i o n c o n n e c t i o n
s e t t i n g s
To define the connection settings of a new profile,
select N e w s y n c p r o f i l e > C o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g s and
define the following settings:
D o w n l o a d !
1 1 0
Select M e n u > D o w n l o a d ! .
With Download! (network service), you can browse,
To view the details of the selected item, select
download, and install items, such as latest applications O p t i o n s > V i e w d e t a i l s .
and related documents, to your device from the web.
To return to the Download! main level, select
The items are categorised under catalogs and folders
provided by Nokia or independent service providers.
Some items may be chargeable, but you can usually
preview them free of charge.
O p t i o n s > H o m e p a g e .
The available options may vary depending on your
service provider, the selected item, and the view you
are in.
Download! uses your network services to access the
most updated content. For information on additional
items available through Download!, contact your
service provider, or the supplier or manufacturer of the
item.
D o w n l o a d ! s e t t i n g s
To change the Download! settings, select O p t i o n s >
S e t t i n g s and from the following:
Only install and use applications and other software
from sources that offer adequate security and
protection against harmful software.
•
•
A c c e s s p o i n t — Select an access point to use to
connect to the service provider's server.
A u t o m a t i c o p e n — Select whether you want the
downloaded item or application to open
automatically after the download is completed.
P r e v i e w c o n f i r m a t i o n — Select whether you want
a confirmation query to be shown before
previewing an item.
S e l e c t c a t a l o g s , f o l d e r s , a n d
i t e m s
•
•
To update the Download! content, select O p t i o n s >
B u y c o n f i r m a t i o n — Select whether you want a
confirmation query to be shown before buying an
item.
R e f r e s h l i s t .
To hide a folder or a catalog from the list, for example,
to view only items that you use frequently, select
O p t i o n s > H i d e . To make the items visible again,
select O p t i o n s > S h o w a l l .
S o f t w a r e u p d a t e s
To buy the selected item, select O p t i o n s > B u y . A
submenu opens, where you can select the version of
the item and view price information.
Nokia may produce software updates that may offer
new features, enhanced functions, or improved
performance. You may be able to request these
updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC
application. To update the device software, you need
the Nokia Software Updater application and a
To download an item that is free of charge, select
O p t i o n s > G e t .
1 1 1
compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or
Vista operating system, broadband internet access,
and a compatible data cable to connect your device to
the PC.
To get more information and to download the Nokia
Software Updater application, visit www.nokia-
asia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia website.
T i p : To check the software version in your
device, enter * # 0 0 0 0 # in the standby mode.
1 1 2
S e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s .
•
•
F a c t o r y s e t t i n g s — Restore the original settings of
the device.
You can define and modify various settings of your
device. Modifying these settings affects the operation
of your device across several applications.
P o s i t i o n i n g — Define the positioning method and
server for GPS-based applications.
Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to
you in a special message by your service provider. You
may not be able to change such settings.
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
Select the setting you want to edit to do the following:
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n .
•
•
•
•
Switch between two values, such as on or off.
Select a value from a list.
D i s p l a y s e t t i n g s
To define the level of light that the device needs before
switching on the backlight, select D i s p l a y > L i g h t
s e n s o r .
To change the text size, select D i s p l a y > F o n t s i z e .
Open a text editor to enter a value.
Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by
scrolling left or right.
To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle
before the screen saver is activated, select D i s p l a y >
P o w e r s a v e r t i m e - o u t .
G e n e r a l s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l .
To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select
Select from the following:
D i s p l a y > W e l c o m e n o t e / l o g o . You can either
•
P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n — Change the display settings and choose the default welcome note, enter your own text,
personalise the device.
or select an image.
•
•
D a t e a n d t i m e — Change the date and time.
E n h a n c e m e n t — Define the settings for your
enhancements.
To set how quickly the display dims after the last
keypress, select D i s p l a y > L i g h t t i m e - o u t .
1 1 3
•
S e c u r i t y — Define the security settings.
To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select
S t a n d b y m o d e s e t t i n g s
T o n e s > R i n g i n g v o l u m e .
To select whether to use the active standby, select
To set the various alert tones, selectT o n e s > M e s s a g e
a l e r t t o n e , E - m a i l a l e r t t o n e , C a l e n d a r a l a r m t o n e ,
or C l o c k a l a r m t o n e .
S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y .
To assign shortcuts for the scroll key and selection keys,
select S t a n d b y m o d e > S h o r t c u t s . These shortcuts
are not available in the active standby.
To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call,
select T o n e s > V i b r a t i n g a l e r t .
To assign shortcuts to applications, select S t a n d b y
To set the volume level of the device keypad tones,
m o d e > S t a n d b y a p p s .
select T o n e s > K e y p a d t o n e s .
To select whether to show or hide the operator logo,
To set the warning tones on or off, select T o n e s >
select S t a n d b y m o d e > O p e r a t o r l o g o > O n or O f f .
W a r n i n g t o n e s .
To select the Inbox or the mailbox that is shown in the
active standby, select S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e
s t a n d b y m a i l b o x .
L a n g u a g e s e t t i n g s
To set the language used on the device display, select
To select the plug-ins that are shown in the active
standby, select S t a n d b y m o d e > A c t i v e s t a n d b y
p l u g - i n s . You can, for example, see how many voice
mails you have. The available plug-ins may vary.
L a n g u a g e > P h o n e l a n g u a g e .
To select the language in which you write notes and
messages, select L a n g u a g e > W r i t i n g l a n g u a g e .
To select whether to use the predictive text input,
T o n e s e t t i n g s
select L a n g u a g e > P r e d i c t i v e t e x t .
To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select T o n e s >
N o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t
R i n g i n g t o n e .
You can set the notification light on the cover of your
device to blink when you have received a new message
or when you have missed a phone call.
To select a ringing tone for video calls, select T o n e s >
V i d e o c a l l t o n e .
To set the ringing type, select T o n e s > R i n g i n g
t y p e . You can also set the device to sound a ringing
tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the
caller and the selected ringing tone, when someone
from your contacts list calls you. Select T o n e s > S a y
c a l l e r ' s n a m e .
To set the length of time you want the notification light
to blink, select N o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t > B l i n k l i g h t f o r .
To select of which events you want to be notified, select
N o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t > N o t i f i e d e v e n t s .
1 1 4
To determine which profile is activated when you
attach an enhancement to your device, select D e f a u l t
p r o f i l e .
D a t e a n d t i m e s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l > D a t e
a n d t i m e .
To let the deviceanswer phone calls automatically after
5 seconds when an enhancement is attached, select
A u t o m a t i c a n s w e r > O n . If the ringing type is set to
B e e p o n c e or S i l e n t in the selected profile, the
automatic answer is disabled.
To set the current date and time, select D a t e and
T i m e .
To define your time zone, select T i m e z o n e .
To update the time, date, and time zone information
automatically (network service), select N e t w o r k
o p e r a t o r t i m e > A u t o - u p d a t e .
To illuminate the device while it is attached to an
enhancement, select L i g h t s > O n .
To select whether to use the 12-hour or 24-hour clock
system and with which symbol to separate hours and
minutes, select T i m e f o r m a t and T i m e s e p a r a t o r .
S e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
To determine the date format and separator, select
S e c u r i t y .
D a t e f o r m a t and D a t e s e p a r a t o r .
Define the following security settings:
To define the clock type, select C l o c k t y p e >
•
•
•
P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d — Adjust the security settings
A n a l o g u e or D i g i t a l .
for your device and SIM card.
C e r t i f i c a t e m a n a g e m e n t — Manage your security
certificates.
To select the tone for the alarm clock, select C l o c k
a l a r m t o n e .
S e c u r i t y m o d u l e — Manage your security module.
To determine the week days that are work days for you,
Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency
numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the
emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks.
When you change a code, enter the current code, then
the new code twice.
select W o r k d a y s .
E n h a n c e m e n t s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > G e n e r a l >
E n h a n c e m e n t .
D e v i c e a n d S I M c a r d s e c u r i t y
To change the PIN code, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d >
P I N c o d e . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The
PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorised
use and is provided with the SIM card. After three
C o m m o n e n h a n c e m e n t s e t t i n g s
With most enhancements, you can do the following:
1 1 5
consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is
power on. Documents, contact information, calendar
blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock entries, and files are unaffected.
it before you can use the SIM card again.
T e l e p h o n e s e t t i n g s
a u t o l o c k p e r i o d .
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e .
To set a time-out after which the device is
automatically locked and can be used only if the correct
lock code is entered, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d >
P h o n e a u t o l o c k p e r i o d . Enter a number for the time-
out in minutes, or select N o n e to set off the autolock
period. When the device is locked, you can still answer
incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the
official emergency number programmed into your
device.
Select from the following:
•
•
C a l l — Define general call settings.
C a l l d i v e r t — Define your call divert settings. See
"Call divert," p. 37.
•
•
C a l l b a r r i n g — Define your call barring settings. See
"Call barring," p. 38.
N e t w o r k — Adjust the network settings.
To set a new lock code, select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d >
L o c k c o d e . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the
current code and then the new code twice. The new
code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and
digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase
alphabets are possible. The device notifies you if the
lock code is not properly formatted.
To set the device to ask for the lock code when an
unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your device,
select P h o n e a n d S I M c a r d > L o c k i f S I M c a r d
c h a n g e d . The device maintains a list of SIM cards that
are recognised as the owners cards.
C a l l s e t t i n g s
To display your phone number to the person you are
calling, select C a l l > S e n d m y c a l l e r I D > Y e s . To let
the network determine whether your caller ID is sent,
select S e t b y n e t w o r k .
To display your net call address to the person you are
calling using a net call, select C a l l > S e n d m y i n t e r n e t
c a l l I D > Y e s .
To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a
call in progress, select C a l l > C a l l w a i t i n g >
O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e . To check if the function is active
on the network, select O p t i o n s > C h e c k s t a t u s .
To select whether net calls alert or not, select C a l l >
I n t e r n e t c a l l a l e r t . You are notified of missed net calls
with a notification.
R e s t o r e o r i g i n a l s e t t i n g s
To restore the original device settings, select F a c t o r y
s e t t i n g s . To do this, you need your device lock code.
After resetting, the device may take a longer time to
1 1 6
To set the default call type, select C a l l > D e f a u l t c a l l
I n t e r n e t c a l l if you make net calls.
To send a text message automatically to the person
who is calling you informing why you cannot answer
the incoming call, select C a l l > R e j e c t c a l l w i t h
S M S > Y e s . To set the text for the message, select
C a l l > M e s s a g e t e x t .
•
•
U S B — Edit the data cable settings. See "Data
cable," p. 91.
A c c e s s p o i n t s — Set up new or edit existing access
points. Some or all access points may be preset for
your device by your service provider, and you may
not be able to create, edit, or remove them.
P a c k e t d a t a — Determine when packet data
connections are used, and enter the access point if
you use your device as a modem for a computer.
W i r e l e s s L A N — Determine if the device displays an
indicator when a WLAN is available, and how often
the device searches for networks.
•
•
•
N e t w o r k s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > P h o n e >
protocol (SIP) profiles.
N e t w o r k .
•
•
I n t e r n e t t e l . — Define settings for net calls.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n s — View and delete trusted servers
from which your device may receive configuration
settings.
To select the network mode, select N e t w o r k m o d e
and D u a l m o d e , U M T S , or G S M . In the dual mode, the
device switches automatically between networks.
To select the operator, select O p e r a t o r s e l e c t i o n and
M a n u a l to choose from available networks, or
A u t o m a t i c to have the device select the network
automatically.
To set the device to indicate when it is used in Micro
Cellular Network (MCN), select C e l l i n f o d i s p l a y >
O n .
•
A P N c o n t r o l — Restrict packet data connections.
See "Restrict packet data," p. 122.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
A c c e s s p o i n t s .
An internet access point is a collection of settings,
which define how the device creates a data connection
to the network. To use e-mail and multimedia services
or to browse web pages, you must first define access
points for these services.
C o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n .
Select from the following:
Some or all access points may be preset for your device
by your service provider, and you may not be able to
create, edit, or remove them.
•
B l u e t o o t h — Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send
and receive data with Bluetooth," p. 93.
1 1 7
To create a new access point, select O p t i o n s > N e w
To have an indicator displayed when there is a WLAN
a c c e s s p o i n t or select an existing access point from the available in your current location, select S h o w W L A N
list and then O p t i o n s > D u p l i c a t e a c c e s s p o i n t to use a v a i l a b i l i t y > Y e s .
the access point as a basis for the new one.
To select the interval for your device to scan for
available WLANs and update the indicator, select S c a n
f o r n e t w o r k s . This setting is not available unless you
P a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S ) s e t t i n g s
select S h o w W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > Y e s .
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
P a c k e t d a t a .
A d v a n c e d W L A N s e t t i n g s
Your device supports packet data connections, such as
GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your
device in GSM and UMTS networks, it is possible to have
multiple data connections active at the same time;
access points can share a data connection, and data
connections remain active, for example, during voice
calls. See "Connection manager," p. 100.
Select O p t i o n s > A d v a n c e d s e t t i n g s . The advanced
WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and
changing them is not recommended.
To edit the settings manually, select A u t o m a t i c
c o n f i g u r a t i o n > D i s a b l e d , and define the following:
•
L o n g r e t r y l i m i t — Enter the maximum number of
transmission attempts if the device does not receive
a receiving acknowledgement signal from the
network.
To define the packet data settings, select P a c k e t d a t a
c o n n e c t i o n and select W h e n a v a i l a b l e to register the
device to the packet data network when you switch the
device on in a supported network, or W h e n n e e d e d to
establish a packet data connection only when an
service provider to use the device as a packet data
modem to your computer.
•
•
S h o r t r e t r y l i m i t — Enter the maximum number of
transmission attempts if the device does not receive
a clear-to-send signal from the network.
R T S t h r e s h o l d — Select the data packet size at
which the WLAN access point device issues a request
to send before sending the packet.
These settings affect all access points for packet data
•
•
•
T X p o w e r l e v e l — Select the power level of your
device when sending data.
connections.
R a d i o m e a s u r e m e n t s — Enable or disable the
radio measurements.
W L A N s e t t i n g s
P o w e r s a v i n g — Select whether to use the WLAN
power saving mechanism to save the power in the
device battery. Using the power saving mechanism
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
W i r e l e s s L A N .
1 1 8
enhances the battery performance but may weaken
WLAN interoperability.
W E P k e y s e t t i n g s
In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same
To restore all settings to their original values, select
WEP key.
O p t i o n s > R e s t o r e d e f a u l t s .
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s > W E P k e y s e t t i n g s
and from the following:
W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s
•
•
W E P e n c r y p t i o n — Select the desired WEP
encryption key length.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
A c c e s s p o i n t s > O p t i o n s > N e w a c c e s s p o i n t , or
select an access point and O p t i o n s > E d i t .
W E P k e y f o r m a t — Select whether you want to
enter the WEP key data in A S C I I or H e x a d e c i m a l
format.
In the access point settings, select W L A N s e c u r i t y
•
W E P k e y — Enter the WEP key data.
m o d e and the desired mode.
8 0 2 . 1 x s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s
W E P s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s
Select W E P as the WLAN security mode.
Select 8 0 2 . 1 x as the WLAN security mode.
8 0 2 . 1 x authenticates and authorises devices to access
a wireless network, and prevents access if the
authorisation process fails.
The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method
encrypts data before it is transmitted. Access to the
network is denied to users who do not have the
required WEP keys. When the WEP security mode is in
use, and your device receives a data packet not
encrypted with the WEP keys, the data is discarded.
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s and fromthe following:
•
•
•
W P A / W P A 2 — Select E A P (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) or P r e - s h a r e d k e y (a
secret key used for device identification).
E A P p l u g - i n s e t t i n g s — If you selected W P A /
W P A 2 > E A P , select which EAP plug-ins defined in
your device to use with the access point.
P r e - s h a r e d k e y — If you selected W P A / W P A 2 >
P r e - s h a r e d k e y , enter the shared private key that
identifies your device to the WLAN to which you
connect.
In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same
WEP key.
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s and fromthe following:
•
•
•
W E P k e y i n u s e — Select the desired WEP key.
A u t h e n t i c a t i o n t y p e — Select O p e n or S h a r e d .
W E P k e y s e t t i n g s — Edit the settings for the WEP
key.
1 1 9
E A P p l u g - i n s
W P A s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s
1. To define the EAP plug-in settings, select O p t i o n s >
N e w a c c e s s p o i n t and define an access point that
uses WLAN as a data bearer.
Select W P A / W P A 2 as the WLAN security mode.
Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s and fromthe following:
•
•
•
W P A / W P A 2 — Select E A P (Extensible
2. Select 8 0 2 . 1 x or W P A / W P A 2 as the security mode.
Authentication Protocol) or P r e - s h a r e d k e y (a
secret key used for device identification).
E A P p l u g - i n s e t t i n g s — If you select W P A /
W P A 2 > E A P , select which EAP plug-ins defined in
your device to use with the access point.
P r e - s h a r e d k e y — If you select W P A / W P A 2 >
P r e - s h a r e d k e y , enter the shared private key that
identifies your device to the WLAN to which you
connect.
3. Select W L A N s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s > W P A / W P A 2 >
E A P > E A P p l u g - i n s e t t i n g s .
U s e E A P p l u g - i n s
To use an EAP plug-in when you connect to a WLAN
using the access point, select the desired plug-in and
O p t i o n s > E n a b l e . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use
with this access point have a check mark next to them.
To not use a plug-in, select O p t i o n s > D i s a b l e .
•
W P A 2 o n l y m o d e — To allow both TKIP and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption, select
O f f . To allow AES only, select O n
To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select O p t i o n s >
E d i t .
To change the priorityof theEAP plug-in settings, select
O p t i o n s > R a i s e p r i o r i t y to attempt to use the plug-
in before other plug-ins when connecting to the
network with the access point, or O p t i o n s > L o w e r
p r i o r i t y to use this plug-in for network authentication
after attempting to use other plug-ins.
W i r e l e s s L A N p l u g i n s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
A c c e s s p o i n t s .
The EAP (extensible authentication protocol) plug-ins
are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless
devices and authentication servers, and the different
EAP plug-ins make possible the use of various EAP
methods (network service).
See the device help for more information on EAP
plugins.
S e s s i o n i n i t i a t i o n p r o t o c o l
( S I P ) s e t t i n g s
You can view the EAP plug-ins currently installed in
your device (network service).
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
S I P s e t t i n g s .
1 2 0
Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating,
modifying, and terminating certain types of
E d i t S I P p r o x y s e r v e r s
Select O p t i o n s > N e w S I P p r o f i l e or E d i t > P r o x y
communication sessions with one or more participants
(network service). Typical communication sessions are
video sharing and net calls. SIP profiles include settings
for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a
communication session is underlined.
s e r v e r .
Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a
browsing service and its users used by some service
providers. These servers may provide additional
security and speed up access to the service.
To create a SIP profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w S I P
p r o f i l e > U s e d e f a u l t p r o f i l e or U s e e x i s t i n g
p r o f i l e .
To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for
communication sessions, select O p t i o n s > D e f a u l t
p r o f i l e .
Select from the following:
•
P r o x y s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the host name or IP
address of the proxy server in use.
•
•
R e a l m — Enter the proxy server realm.
U s e r n a m e and P a s s w o r d — Enter your user name
and password for the proxy server.
•
A l l o w l o o s e r o u t i n g — Select if loose routing is
allowed.
E d i t S I P p r o f i l e s
Select O p t i o n s > E d i t , and select from the following:
•
•
T r a n s p o r t t y p e — Select U D P , A u t o , or T C P .
P o r t — Enter the port number of the proxy server.
•
•
•
P r o f i l e n a m e — Enter a name for the SIP profile.
S e r v i c e p r o f i l e — Select I E T F or N o k i a 3 G P P .
D e f a u l t a c c e s s p o i n t — Select the access point to
use for the internet connection.
E d i t r e g i s t r a t i o n s e r v e r s
Select O p t i o n s > N e w S I P p r o f i l e or E d i t > R e g i s t r a r
•
P u b l i c u s e r n a m e — Enter your user name received
from your service provider.
s e r v e r .
•
•
•
U s e c o m p r e s s i o n — Select if compression is used.
R e g i s t r a t i o n — Select the registration mode.
U s e s e c u r i t y — Select if security negotiation is
used.
Select from the following:
•
R e g i s t r a r s e r v e r a d d r e s s — Enter the host name
or IP address of the registrar server in use.
R e a l m — Enter the registrar server realm.
U s e r n a m e and P a s s w o r d — Enter your user name
and password for the registrar server.
T r a n s p o r t t y p e — Select U D P , A u t o , or T C P .
P o r t — Enter the port number of the registrar
server.
•
•
•
•
P r o x y s e r v e r — Enter the proxy server settings for
this SIP profile.
R e g i s t r a r s e r v e r — Enter the registration server
settings for this SIP profile.
•
•
1 2 1
access point control service. Contact your service
provider for more information.
To restrict the packet data connections from your
device, select O p t i o n s > A c t i v a t e r e s t r i c t i o n s . You
need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate access
point control or to edit the packet data access points
on the control list.
N e t c a l l s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
I n t e r n e t t e l . .
To create a new net call profile, select O p t i o n s > N e w
p r o f i l e .
To edit an existing profile, select O p t i o n s > E d i t .
To add access points that can be used for packet data
connections to the control list, select O p t i o n s > A d d
n a m e m a n u a l l y . To enable connections to an
operator-provided access point, create an empty
access point.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
C o n f i g u r a t i o n s .
To remove access points from the list, select O p t i o n s >
You can receive messages from your service provider
or company information management containing
configuration settings for trusted servers. These
settings are automatically saved in C o n f i g u r a t i o n s .
You may receive configuration settings for access
points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and IM or
synchronisation settings from trusted servers.
R e m o v e .
A p p l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g s
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > A p p l i c a t i o n s .
Select an application from the list to adjust its settings.
To delete configurations for a trusted server, select
O p t i o n s > D e l e t e . The configuration settings for
other applications provided by this server are also
deleted.
R e s t r i c t p a c k e t d a t a
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
A P N c o n t r o l .
With the access point control service, you can restrict
packet data connections from your device to certain
access points only. Your SIM card may not support the
1 2 2
S h o r t c u t s
Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in
your device. Shortcuts can make the use of the
applications more efficient.
Number key (2– Call a phone number using speed
9)
dialling. You must first activate
speed dialling at M e n u > T o o l s >
S e t t i n g s > P h o n e > C a l l >
S p e e d d i a l l i n g > O n .
G e n e r a l s h o r t c u t s
W e b
G e n e r a l s h o r t c u t s
*
Zoom in the page.
Zoom out the page.
Open the search dialog.
View the active pages.
View the page overview.
Power key
Press and hold to switch your device
on and off.
#
2
5
8
9
Press once to switch between
profiles.
A c t i v e s t a n d b y m o d e
Left selection
Lock and unlock the keypad.
Open the dialog for entering a new
key + *
web address.
Call key
0
Open the call log.
0
Open the bookmarks folder.
Press and hold to open your home
I m a g e v i e w e r
page in the Web browser.
Call key
0
Send the image.
Zoom out.
Zoom in.
#
1
Press and hold to switch between
the S i l e n t and G e n e r a l profiles.
Press and hold to call your voice
5
mailbox.
1 2 3
7
Zoom in. Press twice for the full
screen size.
4
6
2
8
3
1
*
Scroll left in the zoomed image.
Scroll right in the zoomed image.
Scroll up in the zoomed image.
Scroll down in the zoomed image.
Rotate clockwise.
Rotate counterclockwise.
Switch between the full screen size
and normal view.
1 2 4
G l o s s a r y
G l o s s a r y
but this translation is needed because
the internet is based on IP addresses.
3G
3rd generation mobile
DTMF tones Dual Tone Multi-Frequency tones. The
DTMF system is used by touch-tone
telephones. DTMF assigns a specific
frequency, or tone, to each key so that
it can easily be identified by a
communications. A digital system for
mobile communications which aims at
global use and provides increased
bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device
user access a wide variety of services,
such as multimedia.
microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you
to communicate with voice mailboxes,
computerised telephony systems, and
so on.
Ad-hoc
operating
mode
A WLAN network mode where two or
more devices connect to each other
using WLAN directly without a WLAN
access point.
Cookies are little pieces of information,
given by the server to you, to store
information about your visits to a web
site. When you accept cookies, the
server is able to evaluate your use of
the web site, what you are interested
in, what you want to read, and so on.
EAP
Extensible authentication protocol.
EAP plug-ins are used in wireless
networks to authenticate wireless
devices and authentication servers.
Cookies
EGPRS
Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar to
GPRS, but it enables faster connection.
For more information on the
availability of EGPRS and data transfer
speed, contact your service provider.
DNS
Domain name service. An internet
service that translates domain names
such as www.nokia.com into IP
addresses such as 192.100.124.195.
Domain names are easier to remember
1 2 5
GPRS
General packet radio service. GPRS
enables wireless access for mobile
phones to data networks (network
service). GPRS uses packet data
technology where information is sent
in short bursts of data over the mobile
network. The benefit of sending data
in packets is that the network is
occupied only when sending or
receiving data. As GPRS uses the
network efficiently, it allows for quick
data connection setup and fast data
transmission speeds.
HTTP
Hypertext transfer protocol. A
document transfer protocol used in the
web.
HTTP over a secure connection.
Internet mail access protocol, version
4. A protocol used for accessing your
remote mailbox.
An access point is where your device
HTTPS
IMAP4
Internet
access point connects to a network. To use e-mail
and multimedia services or to connect
to the internet and browse web pages,
you must first define internet access
points for these services.
You must subscribe to the GPRS service.
For availability and subscription to
GPRS, contact your service provider.
Infrastructur A WLAN network mode where devices
e operating are connected to WLAN using a WLAN
During a voice call, you cannot
establish a GPRS connection, and any
existing GPRS connection is put on hold
unless the network supports dual
transfer mode.
mode
PIN
access point.
Personal identity number. The PIN
code protects your device from
unauthorised use. The PIN code is
supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN
code request is selected, the code is
required each time the device is
switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to
8 digits long.
The PIN2 code is supplied with some
SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to
access certain functions supported by
the SIM card. The length of the PIN2
code is 4 to 8 digits.
GPS
Global positioning system. GPS is a
worldwide radio navigation system.
HSDPA
High-speed downlink packet access.
HSDPA brings high-speed data delivery
to 3G terminals, ensuring that users
requiring effective multimedia
PIN2
capabilities benefit from data rates
previously unavailable because of
limitations in theradio access network.
1 2 6
browse the web faster than previously
possible while simultaneously
speaking on the phone.
PIN code used in UMTS network.
UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is
required to change a blocked UPIN
code or PIN2 code. The length of the
code is 8 digits.
POP3
Post office protocol, version 3. A
common mail protocol that can be
used for accessing your remote
mailbox.
PIN Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2
codes are required to change a blocked
PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively.
The length of the code is 8 digits.
Session initiation protocol. SIP is used
for creating, modifying, and
terminating certain types of
communication sessions with one or
more participants.
UPIN
UPUK
PUK and
PUK2
SIP
USIM
SIM card used in UMTS network.
USSD
A service request, such as request to
activate an application or configure
various settings remotely, that you can
send to your operator or service
provider with your device.
command
SSID
Service set identifier. SSID is the name
that identifies the specific WLAN.
VoIP
VPN
Voice over internet protocol
Streaming
Streaming audio and video files means
playing them directly from the web
without downloading them first to
your device.
technology. VoIP is a set of protocols
that facilitate phone calls over an IP
network, such as the internet.
Virtual private network. VPN creates a
secure connection to compatible
corporate intranet and services, such
as e-mail.
Wireless application protocol. WAP is
an international standard for wireless
communication.
Wired equivalent privacy. WEP is an
encryption method that encrypts data
before it is transmitted in WLAN.
Wireless local area network.
UMTS
Universal mobile telecommunications
system. UMTS is a 3G mobile
communication system. Besides voice
and data, UMTS enables audio and
video delivery to wireless devices.
WAP
WEP
When you use your device in GSM and
UMTS networks, multiple data
connections can be active at the same
time, and access points can share a
data connection. In the UMTS network,
data connections remain active during
voice calls. You can, for example,
1 2 7
WLAN
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security
method for WLAN.
WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security
method for WLAN.
1 2 8
N o k i a o r i g i n a l e n h a n c e m e n t s
•
Installation of any complex car enhancements must
be made by qualified personnel only.
W a r n i n g : Use only batteries, chargers, and
enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this
particular model. The use of any other types may
invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be
dangerous.
B a t t e r y
Type
BP-6MT
An extensive range of
Talk time
Up to
Standby
min Up to
enhancements is available for
your device. Please visit
www.nokia-asia.com/
3
h
06
1
3
days
enhancements for more details.
For availability of the
I m p o r t a n t : Battery talk and standby times are
estimates only and depend on signal strength, network
conditions, features used, battery age and condition,
temperatures to which battery is exposed, use in
digital mode, and many other factors. The amount of
time a device is used for calls will affect its standby
time. Likewise, the amount of time that the device is
turned on and in the standby mode will affect its talk
time.
enhancements, please check
with your local dealer.
E n h a n c e m e n t s
Practical rules about accessories and enhancements
•
reach of small children.
•
When you disconnect the power cord of any
accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug,
not the cord.
•
Check regularly that enhancements installed in a
1 2 9
vehicle are mounted and are operating properly.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Q : W h y c a n ’ t I f i n d m y f r i e n d ’ s d e v i c e w h i l e u s i n g
B l u e t o o t h c o n n e c t i v i t y ?
To see frequently asked questions about your device,
visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site.
Q : W h a t i s m y l o c k , P I N , o r P U K c o d e ?
A: Check that both devices are compatible, have
activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in the
hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the
two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that
there are no walls or other obstructions between the
devices.
A: The default lock code is 1 2 3 4 5 . If you forget or lose
the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget
or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received
such a code, contact your network service provider.
Q : H o w d o I c l o s e a n a p p l i c a t i o n t h a t i s n o t
r e s p o n d i n g ?
Q : W h y c a n ’ t I e n d a B l u e t o o t h c o n n e c t i o n ?
A: If another device is connected to your device, you
can end the connection using the other device or by
deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select M e n u >
C o n n e c t i v i t y > B l u e t o o t h > B l u e t o o t h > O f f .
A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the
application, and press the backspace key to close the
application.
Q : W h y d o i m a g e s l o o k s m u d g y ?
Q : W h y c a n ' t I s e e a W L A N a c c e s s p o i n t e v e n t h o u g h
I k n o w I ' m w i t h i n i t s r a n g e ?
A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are
clean.
A: Check that the Offline profile is not in use in your
Q : W h y d o m i s s i n g , d i s c o l o u r e d , o r b r i g h t d o t s
a p p e a r o n t h e s c r e e n e v e r y t i m e I s w i t c h o n m y
d e v i c e ?
device.
The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set
identifier (SSID). You can only access networks that use
a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have
created a WLAN access point for the network on your
Nokia device
A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some
displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or
off. This is normal, not a fault.
Check that the WLAN access point is not on channels
12-13, as they cannot be associated with.
1 3 0
Q : H o w d o I s w i t c h W L A N o f f o n m y N o k i a d e v i c e ?
Q : W h y d o I h a v e p r o b l e m s w i t h t h e s e c u r i t y m o d e ?
A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when
A: Check that you have configured the security mode
you are not trying to connect, not connected to another correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses.
access point, or not scanning for available networks.
To check the security mode the network uses, select
To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > C o n n . m g r . > A c t i v e d a t a
that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less
often, for available networks in the background. WLAN
switches off in between background scans.
c o n n e c t i o n s > O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s .
Check also the following: you have the correct WPA
mode (preshared key or EAP), you have disabled all EAP
To stop the background scans, select M e n u > T o o l s > types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings
S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > W i r e l e s s L A N > S h o w
W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > N e v e r . You can still manually
scan for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN
networks as usual.
are correct (passwords, user names, certificates).
Q : W h y c a n ’ t I s e l e c t a c o n t a c t f o r m y m e s s a g e ?
A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an
address, or an e-mail address. Select M e n u >
C o n t a c t s , and edit the contact card.
To increase the background scan interval, select S h o w
W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > Y e s , and define the interval in
S c a n f o r n e t w o r k s .
Q : T h e n o t e R e t r i e v i n g m e s s a g e i s s h o w n b r i e f l y .
W h a t i s h a p p e n i n g ?
Q : W h y c a n ' t I b r o w s e t h e w e b e v e n t h o u g h t h e
W L A N c o n n e c t i o n i s w o r k i n g a n d t h e I P s e t t i n g s
a r e c o r r e c t ?
A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia
message from the multimedia messaging centre. This
note is shown if you have set M u l t i m e d i a r e t r i e v a l to
A l w a y s a u t o m a t i c in the multimedia message
settings. Check that the settings for multimedia
messaging are defined correctly and that there are no
mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See
"Multimedia message settings," p. 61.
A: Check that you have defined the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy
settings correctly in the advanced settings of your
WLAN access point.
Q : H o w d o I c h e c k t h e s i g n a l q u a l i t y o f m y W L A N
c o n n e c t i o n ?
Q : H o w c a n I e n d t h e d a t a c o n n e c t i o n w h e n t h e
d e v i c e s t a r t s a d a t a c o n n e c t i o n a g a i n a n d a g a i n ?
A: Select M e n u > C o n n e c t i v i t y > C o n n . m g r . >
A c t i v e d a t a c o n n e c t i o n s > O p t i o n s > D e t a i l s . If
the signal quality is weak or moderate, you may
encounter connection problems. Try again closer to
the access point.
A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia
message from the multimedia message centre. To stop
the device from making a data connection, select
M e n u > M e s s a g i n g > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
M u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e > M u l t i m e d i a r e t r i e v a l >
M a n u a l to have the multimedia messaging centre save
1 3 1
messages to be retrieved later, or O f f to ignore all
incoming multimedia messages. If you select M a n u a l ,
you receive a notification when there is a new
multimedia message that you can retrieve in the
multimedia message centre. If you select O f f , the
device does not make any network connections related
to multimedia messaging.
Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n >
P a c k e t d a t a > P a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n > W h e n
n e e d e d .
•
•
•
Prevent the device from automatically downloading
new maps in the Maps application. Select M e n u >
T o o l s > M a p s > O p t i o n s > S e t t i n g s >
N e t w o r k > U s e n e t w o r k > O f f .
To set the device to use a packet data connection only
if you start an application or action that needs it, select
M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > P a c k e t
d a t a > P a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n > W h e n n e e d e d .
Change the time-out after which the backlight is
switched off. Select M e n u > T o o l s > S e t t i n g s >
G e n e r a l > P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n > D i s p l a y > L i g h t
t i m e - o u t .
If this does not help, switch the device off, and switch
Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold
the home key. Scroll to the application, and press
the backspace key to close the application.
it on again.
Q : W h y d o I h a v e p r o b l e m s c o n n e c t i n g t h e d e v i c e
t o m y P C ?
A: Ensure that you have the latest version of Nokia PC
Suite and that it is installed and running on your
compatible PC. For further information on how to use
Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite
or visit the support pages of the Nokia web site.
Q : H o w d o I s a v e b a t t e r y p o w e r ?
A: Many features in your device increase the demand
on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To
save battery power, do the following:
•
•
Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it.
Stop the background scans for WLAN. Select M e n u >
T o o l s > S e t t i n g s > C o n n e c t i o n > W i r e l e s s
L A N > S h o w W L A N a v a i l a b i l i t y > N e v e r . You can
still manually scan for available WLAN networks and
connect to WLAN networks as usual.
1 3 2
•
Set the device to use a packet data connection only
if you start an application or action that needs it.
B a t t e r y i n f o r m a t i o n
Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-
circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a
coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery.
(These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might
happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery
in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals
may damage the battery or the connecting object.
C h a r g i n g a n d
d i s c h a r g i n g
Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The
battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of
times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk
and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal,
replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries,
and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved
chargers designated for this device.
Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a
closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce
the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to
keep the battery between 15°C and 25°C (59°F and 77°
F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work
temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged.
Battery performance is particularly limited in
If a replacement battery is being used for the first time
or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged
period, it may be necessary to connect the charger,
then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the
battery.
temperatures well below freezing.
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may
explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged.
Dispose of batteries according to local regulations.
Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as
household waste.
Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the
device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged
battery connected to a charger, since overcharging
may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged
battery will lose its charge over time.
Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the
event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come
in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a
leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with water,
or seek medical help.
If the battery is completely discharged, it may take
several minutes before the charging indicator appears
on the display or before any calls can be made.
Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use
1 3 3
any charger or battery that is damaged.
2. When you angle the hologram
left, right, down and up, you
should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on
each side respectively.
N o k i a b a t t e r y
a u t h e n t i c a t i o n
g u i d e l i n e s
Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To
check that you are getting an original Nokia battery,
purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and
inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
W h a t i f y o u r b a t t e r y i s n o t
a u t h e n t i c ?
Successful completion of the steps is not a total
assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have
any reason to believe that your battery is not an
authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain
from using it, and take it to the nearest authorised
Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your
authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect
the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be
verified, return the battery to the place of purchase.
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the
hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery,
please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest
authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance.
The use of a battery that is not approved by the
manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in
poor performance and damage to your device and its
enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or
warranty applying to the device.
To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit
A u t h e n t i c a t e h o l o g r a m
www.nokia.com/battery.
1. When you look at the
hologram on the label, you
should see the Nokia
connecting hands symbol
from one angle and the Nokia
Original Enhancements logo
when looking from another
angle.
1 3 4
C a r e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e
Your device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
following suggestions will help you protect your
warranty coverage.
•
•
•
•
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or
strong detergents to clean the device.
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving
parts and prevent proper operation.
•
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all
types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals
that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device
does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the
device to dry completely before replacing it.
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such
ascamera, proximitysensor, and lightsensor lenses.
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement
antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or
attachments could damage the device and may
violate regulations governing radio devices.
•
•
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas.
Its moving parts and electronic components can be
damaged.
•
•
Use chargers indoors.
Always create a backup of data you want to keep,
Do not store the device in hot areas. High
temperatures can shorten the life of electronic
devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain
plastics.
such as contacts and calendar notes.
•
To reset the device from time to time for optimum
performance, power off the device and remove the
battery.
•
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the
device returns to its normal temperature, moisture
can form inside the device and damage electronic
circuit boards.
These suggestions apply equally to your device,
battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is
not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized
service facility for service.
•
•
Do not attempt to open the device other than as
instructed in this guide.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards and fine
mechanics.
1 3 5
A d d i t i o n a l s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n
S m a l l c h i l d r e n
M e d i c a l d e v i c e s
Your device and its enhancements may contain small
Operation of any radio transmitting equipment,
including wireless phones, may interfere with the
functionality of inadequately protected medical
devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the
medical device to determine if they are adequately
shielded from external RF energy or if you have any
questions. Switch off your device in health care
facilities when any regulations posted in these areas
instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities
may be using equipment that could be sensitive to
external RF energy.
parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children.
O p e r a t i n g
e n v i r o n m e n t
This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used
either in the normal use position against the ear or
when positioned at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inches)
away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or
holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not
contain metal and should position the device the
above-stated distance from your body.
I m p l a n t e d m e d i c a l d e v i c e s
Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a
minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches)
should be maintained between a wireless device and
an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the medical device. Persons who
have such devices should:
To transmit data files or messages, this device requires
a quality connection to the network. In some cases,
transmission of data files or messages may be delayed
until such a connection is available. Ensure the above
separation distance instructions are followed until the
transmission is completed.
•
Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3
centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device
when the wireless device is turned on.
Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials
may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit
cards or other magnetic storage media near the device,
because information stored on them may be erased.
1 3 6
•
•
Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket.
warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly
that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is
mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry
flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the
same compartment as the device, its parts, or
enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag,
remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not
place objects, including installed or portable wireless
equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag
deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious
injury could result.
Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the
medical device to minimize the potential for
interference.
•
•
Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is
any reason to suspect that interference is taking
place.
Read and follow the directions from the
manufacturer of their implanted medical device.
If you have any questions about using your wireless
device with an implanted medical device, consult your
health care provider.
Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited.
Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The
use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be
dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the
wireless telephone network, and may be illegal.
H e a r i n g a i d s
Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some
hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your
service provider.
P o t e n t i a l l y e x p l o s i v e
e n v i r o n m e n t s
V e h i c l e s
Switch off your device when in any area with a
RF signals may affect improperly installed or
inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor
vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems,
electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems,
electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems.
For more information, check with the manufacturer, or
its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment
that has been added.
potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs
and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres
include areas where you would normally be advised to
turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could
cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or
even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points
such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe
restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel
depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical
plants; or where blasting operations are in progress.
Only qualified personnel should service the device or
install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or
service may be dangerous and may invalidate any
1 3 7
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are
often, but not always, clearly marked. They include
below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn
those features off before you can make an emergency
call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode,
facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or you may need to change the profile to activate the
particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You
phone function before you can make an emergency
should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more
liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to information.
determine if this device can be safely used in their
vicinity.
When making an emergency call, give all the necessary
information as accurately as possible. Your wireless
device may be the only means of communication at the
scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given
permission to do so.
E m e r g e n c y c a l l s
I m p o r t a n t : Wireless phones, including this
device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks,
landline networks, and user-programmed functions.
Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be
guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any
wireless device for essential communications like
medical emergencies.
C E R T I F I C A T I O N
I N F O R M A T I O N ( S A R )
T h i s m o b i l e d e v i c e m e e t s g u i d e l i n e s f o r e x p o s u r e
t o r a d i o w a v e s .
Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver.
It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to
radio waves recommended by international
To make an emergency call:
1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for
adequate signal strength.
guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the
independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include
safety margins designed to assure the protection of all
persons, regardless of age and health.
Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is
properly inserted in the device.
2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear
The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a
unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption
Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP
the display and ready the device for calls.
3. Enter the official emergency number for your
present location. Emergency numbers vary by
location.
guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over
10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using
standard operating positions with the device
1 3 8 4. Press the call key.
transmitting at its highest certified power level in all
tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an
operating device can be below the maximum value
because the device is designed to use only the power
required to reach the network. That amount changes
depending on a number of factors such as how close
you are to a network base station. The highest SAR
value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device
at the ear is 1.40 W/kg.
Use of device accessories and enhancements may
result in different SAR values. SAR values may vary
depending on national reporting and testing
requirements and the network band. Additional SAR
information may be provided under product
information at www.nokia-asia.com.
1 3 9
M A N U F A C T U R E R ’ S L I M I T E D W A R R A N T Y
This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not
affect your legal (statutory) rights under your
applicable national laws relating to the sale of
consumer products.
(hereinafter “Warranty Period”). The different
Warranty Periods are:
a) twelve (12) months for the mobile device and
accessories (whether included in the mobile device
sales package or sold separately) other than the
consumable parts and accessories listed in (b) and (c)
below;
Nokia Corporation (“Nokia”) provides this Limited
Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia
product(s) included in the sales package (“Product”).
Nokia warrants to you that during the warranty period b) six (6) months for the following consumable parts
Nokia or a Nokia authorized service company will in a
commercially reasonable time remedy defects in
materials, design and workmanship free of charge by
repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion
deem it necessary, replacing the Product in accordance
with this Limited Warranty (unless otherwise required
by law). This Limited Warranty is only valid and
enforceable in the country where you have purchased
the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that
country.
and accessories: batteries, chargers, desk stands,
headsets, cables and covers; and
c) ninety (90) days for the media on which any software
is provided, for example, CD-ROM or memory card
As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty
Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise
affected due to subsequent resale, repair or
replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s)
will be warranted for the remainder of the original
Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the date of
repair, whichever is longer.
W a r r a n t y p e r i o d
The warranty period starts at the time of Product's
original purchase by the first end-user. The Product
may consist of several different parts and different
parts may be covered by a different warranty period
1 4 0
whether included during installment, assembly,
shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or
otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the
extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not
warrant that any Nokia software will meet your
requirements, will work in combination with any
hardware or software applications provided by a third
party, that the operation of the software will be
uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in the
software are correctable or will be corrected.
H o w t o g e t w a r r a n t y
s e r v i c e
If you wish to make a claim under the Limited
Warranty, you may call the Nokia call center (where this
is available and please note national rates apply to
calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product or
the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a
Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location.
Information about Nokia care centers, Nokia
2. This Limited Warranty does not cover a) normal wear
and tear (including, without limitation, wear and tear
of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport
costs, c) defects caused by rough handling (including,
without limitation, defects caused by sharp items, by
bending, compressing or dropping, etc.), d) defects or
damage caused by misuse of the Product, including use
that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia
(e.g. as set out in the Product's user guide) and/or e)
other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia.
designated service locations and Nokia call centers can
be found at local Nokia web pages where available.
You must return your Product or the affected part (if it
is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or
Nokia designated service location before the expiry of
the Warranty Period.
When making a Limited Warranty claim you have to
present: a) the Product (or affected part thereto), b) the
legible and unmodified original proof of purchase,
which clearly indicates the name and address of the
seller, the date and place of purchase, the product type
and the IMEI or other serial number.
3. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects or
alleged defects caused by the fact that the Product was
used with, or connected to, a product, accessories,
software and/or service not manufactured, supplied or
authorized by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its
intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from
your or from a third party's unauthorised access to
services, other accounts, computer systems or
networks. This unauthorised access can take place
through hacking, password-mining or through a
variety of other means.
This Limited Warranty extends only to the original first
end-user of the Product and is not assignable or
transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end-user.
W h a t i s n o t c o v e r e d ?
1. This Limited Warranty does not cover user manuals
or any third party software, settings, content, data or
links, whether included/downloaded in the Product,
4. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects caused
by the fact that the battery has been short-circuited or
by the fact that the seals of the battery enclosure or the
1 4 1
cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by
the fact that the battery has been used in equipment
other than those for which it has been specified.
the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that
are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock
any SIM-lock or other lock.
5. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product Please remember to make backup copies or keep
has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone
written records of all important content and data
other than an authorized service centre, if it is repaired stored in your Product, because content and data may
using unauthorised spare parts or if the Product’s serial be lost during repair or replacement of the Product.
number, the mobile accessory date code or the IMEI
Nokia, in a manner consistent with the provisions of
number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or the section entitled “Limitation of Nokia's Liability”
are illegible in any way and this shall be determined in below, to the extent permitted by applicable law(s),
the sole discretion of Nokia.
shall not under any circumstances be liable, either
expressly or implied, for any damages or losses of any
kind whatsoever resulting from loss of, damage to, or
corruption of, content or data during repair or
replacement of the Product.
6. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product
has been exposed to moisture, to dampness or to
extreme thermal or environmental conditions or to
rapid changes in such conditions, to corrosion, to
oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence
from chemical products.
All parts of the Product or other equipment that Nokia
has replaced shall become the property of Nokia. If the
returned Product is found not to be covered by the
terms and conditions of the Limited Warranty, Nokia
and its authorized service companies reserve the right
to charge a handling fee. When repairing or replacing
the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are
new, equivalent to new or reconditioned.
O t h e r i m p o r t a n t
n o t i c e s
A third party, independent operator provides the SIM
card and cellular and/or other network or system on
which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not
accept responsibility under this warranty for the
operation, availability, coverage, services or range of
the cellular or other network or system. Before the
Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may
need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may have
been added to lock the product to a specific network
or operator. Accordingly, Nokia does not accept
responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or for
Your Product may contain country specific elements,
including software. If the Product has beenre-exported
from its original destination country to another
country, the Product may contain country specific
elements that are not considered to be a defect under
this Limited Warranty.
1 4 2
L i m i t a t i o n o f N o k i a ' s S t a t u t o r y o b l i g a t i o n s
This Limited Warranty must be read subject to any
l i a b i l i t y
statutory provisions that imply warranties or
conditions into this Limited Warranty that cannot be
excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded,
restricted or modified except to a limited extent. If such
statutoryprovisions apply, tothe extent to whichNokia
is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will
be limited, at its option to, in the case of goods: the
replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent
goods, the repair of the goods, the payment of the cost
of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent
goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods
repaired; and in the case of services: the supplying of
the services again or the payment of the cost of having
the services supplied again.
This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive
remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclusive
liability in respect of defects in your Product. However,
this Limited Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i)
any of your legal (statutory) rights under the applicable
national laws or ii) any of your rights against the seller
of the Product.
This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia
warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-
mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise,
including, without limitation, and where permitted by
applicable law, any implied conditions, warranties or
other terms as to satisfactory quality or fitness for
purpose. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s)
Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or
damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit,
loss of use of Products or functionality, loss of business,
loss of contracts, loss of revenues or loss of anticipated
savings, increased costs or expenses or for any indirect
loss or damage, consequential loss or damage or
special loss or damage. To the extent permitted by
applicable law, Nokia’s liability shall be limited to the
purchase value of the Product. The above limitations
shall not apply to death or personal injury resulting
from Nokia’s proven negligence.
N o t e : Your Product is a sophisticated electronic
device. Nokia strongly encourages you to familiarise
yourself with the user guide and instructions provided
with and for the Product. Please also note that the
Product might contain high precision displays, camera
lenses and other such parts, which could be scratched
or otherwise damaged if not handled very carefully.
All warranty information, product features and
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Nokia Corporation
Keilalahdentie 2-4
FIN-02150 Espoo
Finland
1 4 3
I n d e x
a u d i o t h e m e s 2 6
a u t o l o c k p e r i o d 1 1 5
C a l e n d a r
S y m b o l s / N u m e r i c s
3 - D r i n g i n g t o n e s 2 6
8 0 2 . 1 x
adding received entries 45
creating entries 45
day view 47
B
deleting entries 45
month view 47
sending entries 45
settings 47
charging 14
inserting 13
b l o g s 4 9
A
a c c e s s p o i n t s
creating 117
to-do view 47
week view 47
c a l e n d a r k e y 2 8
c a l l b a r r i n g 3 8
net calls 38
a c t i v a t i o n k e y s 1 0 8
A c t i v e n o t e s 6 4
settings 64
B l u e t o o t h
a c t i v e s t a n d b y 2 1
a l a r m c l o c k 7 0
a l e r t t o n e s 1 1 4
a l t i t u d e c a l i b r a t i o n 8 8
a n i m a t e d s c r e e n s a v e r 2 5
a n t e n n a s 3 1
authorising devices 94
c a l l d i v e r t 3 7
pairing 94
c a l l e r I D 1 1 6
c a l l s
passcode 94
security 95
answering 33
barring net calls 38
call waiting 116
caller ID 116
b r o w s i n g
common actions 22
conference call 34
fax calls 34
offline 49
installing 107
web 48
shortcuts 114
making 33
sending 44
a t t a c h m e n t s
making a call from Log 42
making a net call 37
muting the ringing tone 33
net call alert 116
PTT 82
e-mail 53
C
multimedia messages 58
sound clips 59
c a b l e 9 1
c a c h e
a u d i o f i l e s
emptying 49
details 75
1 4 4
rejecting 33
C a l c u l a t o r 6 5
sending 75
c o n n e c t o r s 1 5
c o n t a c t s
rejecting with text
message 116
E
e - m a i l
selecting type 116
settings 116
adding thumbnails 42
copying information 42
creating 42
automatic retrieval
settings 63
connecting to mailbox 53
connection settings 62
creating folders 54
deleting 54
speed dialling 37
voice commands 40
voice dialling 40
groups 43
searching 42
SIM directory 44
replying 53
retrieval settings 62
sending 54
c o n v e r t i n g
setting up 52
c a r k i t
user settings 62
writing 54
remote SIM access 95
c e l l b r o a d c a s t 6 0
settings 63
currencies 68
measurements 68
c u r r e n c y c o n v e r s i o n s 6 8
c u s t o m e r s e r v i c e 1 9
e - m a i l k e y 2 8
E A P
c e r t i f i c a t e s
plug-in settings 120
using an EAP plug-in 120
e n d i n g
internet connections 49
network connections 100
e n h a n c e m e n t s
details 104
D
d a t e
settings 104
c h a r g i n g t h e b a t t e r y 1 4
C l o c k
settings 115
alarms 70
removing 88
setting 88
remote SIM access 95
Bluetooth 93
settings 115
e q u a l i s e r 7 6
indicators 17
settings 113
D o w n l o a d !
catalogs 111
settings 111
D T M F t o n e s 3 9
F
f a x c a l l s 3 4
f e e d s 4 9
F i l e m a n a g e r 6 6
f i l e s
data cable 91
infrared 92
modem 100
c o n n e c t i o n s
downloading 73
flash files 80
sending 66
ending 100
GPRS settings 98
WLAN settings 99
1 4 5
f i x e d d i a l l i n g 4 4 , 1 0 3
f r e e m e m o r y 2 8
i n s e r t i n g
sending 90
l a n g u a g e
battery 13
memory card 29
SIM card 13
changing 31
G
settings 114
i n s t a l l a t i o n l o g 1 0 7
i n s t a l l i n g
l o c k c o d e 1 0 2 , 1 1 5
l o c k i n g
G a l l e r y 7 3
G e n u i n e e n h a n c e m e n t s 1 2 9
G P R S
applications 107
device 102
i n t e r n e t 4 8
device autolock 115
keypad 17, 115
L o g 4 1
access point settings 98
advanced access point
settings 118
Contacts 41
deleting 41
H
j a d f i l e s 1 0 7
J a v a a p p l i c a t i o n s 1 0 7
making a call 42
sending messages 42
settings 42
h e a d s e t
connecting 16
h o m e k e y 2 7
transfer log 24
K
H S D P A ( h i g h - s p e e d d o w n l i n k
p a c k e t a c c e s s ) 9 1
l o g o s
k e y s t o r e 1 0 5
k e y g u a r d 1 7
k e y p a d
operator logo 114
welcome logo 113
I
I M
M
locking 17
blocking users 79
groups 78
m a i l b o x e s
tones 114
connecting 53
k e y s 1 5
creating 52
activation keys 108
shortcuts 114
settings 78
m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s 1 9
converting 68
m e a s u r i n g s y s t e m
changing 88
i m a g e s
display background 74
rotating 73
L
l a n d m a r k s
sending 74
categories 89
creating 89
editing 89
receiving 90
m e m o r y 2 8
m e m o r y c a r d
zooming 73
i n d i c a t o r s 1 7
i n f r a r e d 9 2
1 4 6
backing up data 105
formatting 29
inserting 29
track lists 76
restricting 122
settings 118
locking 102
N
p a i r i n g
microSD 29
passwords 102
setting password 29, 66
unlocking 29
devices 94
n e t c a l l s 3 7
passcode 94
alert settings 116
p a s s w o r d s
barring 38
m e n u 2 2
memory card password 29,
connecting 36
profiles 36, 122
settings 122
m e s s a g e r e a d e r 5 1
66
P C S u i t e 9 1
P D F r e a d e r 6 9
p e r s o n a l i s a t i o n 2 5
changing language 114
display 113
configuration messages 122
other settings 63
sending sound clips 59
service messages 59
text message settings 60
M e s s a g i n g
settings 117
N o k i a P C S u i t e 9 1
N o k i a s u p p o r t a n d c o n t a c t
i n f o r m a t i o n 1 9
N o k i a T e a m S u i t e 6 7
action bar settings 67
editing teams 67
settings 67
standby modes 114
tones 114
p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s
forwarding 56
viewing 55
P I N c o d e
folders 50, 51
m i c r o S D 2 9
changing 115
m o d e m 1 0 0
p l a y i n g
N o t e s 7 1
m u l t i m e d i a m e s s a g e s
attachments 58
messages 51
n o t i f i c a t i o n l i g h t 1 1 4
recordings 77
video and audio 74
O
p o s i t i o n i n g
forwarding 58
o p e r a t o r
settings 84
logo 114
p r e d i c t i v e t e x t i n p u t 3 1 , 1 1 4
p r e s e n t a t i o n s 5 7
p r i n t e r s e t t i n g s 7 0
p r i n t i n g 6 9
receiving 57
selecting 117
o r i g i n a l s e t t i n g s 1 1 6
sending options 59
settings 61
P
p r o f i l e s
p a c k e t d a t a
m u l t i t a s k i n g 2 8
M u s i c p l a y e r
creating 24
access point settings 98
advanced access point
settings 98
customising 24, 25
net call profile 36, 122
selecting ringing tones 25
listening to music 75
1 4 7
music categories 76
P T T
r e s t o r i n g o r i g i n a l s e t t i n g s 1 1 6
r i n g i n g t o n e s 4 3 , 1 1 4
3-D 26
advanced WLAN 118
application installations 107
applications 122
Calendar 47
contacts 83
created calls 82
creating a channel 83
exiting 83
in profiles 25
vibrating alert 114
calls 116
making a call 82
settings 82
camera 73
S
cell broadcast 63
certificate 104
clock 70
s a v i n g
Q
date 115
files 22
display 113
Download! application 111
e-mail connection 62
e-mail retrieval 63
e-mail user 62
EAP plug-ins 120
enhancements 115
GPRS 98, 118
settings 22
R
S e a r c h a p p l i c a t i o n 6 5
search results 65
s e a r c h i n g
r a d i o
listening to 80
saved stations 81
settings 81
available WLANs 100
contacts 42
viewing visual content 81
IM 78
s e c u r i t y
R e a l P l a y e r
Java application security 107
keypad lock 115
language 114
Log 42
Bluetooth 95
playing media clips 74
sending files 75
settings 75
s e c u r i t y m o d u l e 1 0 5
viewing clip details 75
multimedia messages 61
net call 122
playing recordings 77
network 117
files 22, 66
Nokia Team Suite 67
packet data 118
positioning 84
printer 70
videos 35
r e c o r d i n g
s e r v i c e c o m m a n d s 5 9
s e r v i c e m e s s a g e s 5 9
settings 63
sound clips 77
video clips 72
PTT 82
r e m o t e c o n f i g u r a t i o n 1 0 5
r e m o t e l o c k 1 0 2
r e m o t e s y n c h r o n i s a t i o n 1 1 0
r e p a i r s e r v i c e s 1 9
radio 81
s e s s i o n i n i t i a t i o n p r o t o c o l
See SIP
RealPlayer 75
recorder 77
1 4 8
s e t t i n g s
restoring 116
Active notes 64
s o f t w a r e u p d a t e 1 1 1
s o u n d c l i p s
service messages 63
SIP 120
changing 25
downloading 26
t i m e
standby mode 114
time 115
recording 77
sending 59
settings 115
t o - d o e n t r i e s 4 6
t o n e s 1 1 4
S p e e c h 5 1
s p e e d d i a l l i n g 3 7
s t a n d b y m o d e s
tones 114
Web 49
settings 114
t r a c k l i s t s 7 6
t r a d i t i o n a l t e x t i n p u t 3 0
T r a n s f e r
WLAN 118
s u p p o r t i n f o r m a t i o n 1 9
S y m b i a n a p p l i c a t i o n s 1 0 7
settings 110
s h o r t c u t s 1 2 3
applications 114
keys 114
log 24
t r a n s f e r r i n g d a t a 2 3
t r i p d e s t i n a t i o n 8 8
t r i p m e t e r 8 8
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 1 3 0
synchronisation profiles 110
U
s i g n a l s t r e n g t h 1 7
S I M a c c e s s p r o f i l e 9 5
S I M c a r d
s y n c h r o n i s i n g
applications 110
U P I N c o d e
changing 115
T
inserting 13
U S B d a t a c a b l e 9 1
text messages 55
S I M c h a n g e l o c k 1 1 5
S I P
t a b s 2 2
t e x t
traditional input 30
t e x t m e s s a g e s
messages on SIM card 55
sending 54
v i b r a t i n g a l e r t 1 1 4
v i d e o c a l l s
editing profiles 121
v i d e o c l i p s 7 2
details 75
playing 74
settings 120
sending 75
s i s f i l e s 1 0 7
sending options 55
settings 60
v i d e o s h a r i n g 3 5
receiving invitations 35
V o i c e a i d 3 9
s i s x f i l e s 1 0 7
s o f t w a r e p a c k a g e s
installation settings 107
installing 107
writing 54
1 4 9
t h e m e s
audio 26
v o i c e c o m m a n d s
changing profiles 41
launching an application 40
settings 41
WEP keys 119
WPA security settings 120
W L A N w i z a r d 9 6
w o r l d c l o c k 7 0
W P A s e c u r i t y s e t t i n g s 1 2 0
w r i t i n g l a n g u a g e 3 1
v o i c e m a i l
calling 39
v o i c e o v e r I P 3 7
Z
Z i p m a n a g e r 6 8
v o l u m e 2 7
w a l l p a p e r 7 4
w a r n i n g t o n e s 1 1 4
W e b
connection security 48
settings 49
w e b l o g s 4 9
W e l c o m e a p p l i c a t i o n 2 0
w e l c o m e n o t e 1 1 3
W E P
keys 119
security settings 119
W L A N
settings 99
availability 96
MAC address 96, 118
searching for networks 100
security settings 119
settings 118
1 5 0
Nokia Care Online
INTERACTIVE
DEMONSTRATIONS
The Nokia Care web support provides you with more information on our online services.
INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATIONS
Learn how to set up your phone for the first time, and find out more about its features.
Interactive Demonstrations give step-by-step instructions on using your phone.
SOFTWARE
USER’S GUIDE
The online User’s Guide contains detailed information on your phone. Remember to check
regularly for updates.
SOFTWARE
Make the most of your phone with software for your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects
your phone and PC so you can manage your calendar, contacts, music and images, while
other applications complement its use.
SETTINGS
Certain phone functions, such as multimedia messaging, mobile browsing and email*,
may require settings before you can use them. Have them sent to your phone free of charge.
USER’S GUIDE
*Not available on all phones.
SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE?
The Set Up section, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup, helps you prepare your phone for use. Familiarise yourself with phone functions
HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AND PC?
Connecting your phone to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets you
synchronise your calendar and contacts.
WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR MY PHONE?
WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS?
Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on your phone and other Nokia products and
services.
HOW DO I KEEP UP WITH NOKIA NEWS?
Subscribe online at www.nokia-asia.com/signup and be the first to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia
Connections" to receive monthly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up for "Be The First To Know" to get exclusive
previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promotional Communications" for upcoming events.
Please visit your own country site for more details:
Australia and New Zealand
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
|